http://wiki.ipitomy.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&user=Nichole&feedformat=atom
IPitomy Wiki - User contributions [en]
2024-03-28T17:30:24Z
User contributions
MediaWiki 1.35.11
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=IP_PBX_Manual_Table_of_Contents&diff=2189
IP PBX Manual Table of Contents
2013-06-04T15:52:22Z
<p>Nichole: </p>
<hr />
<div>__NOTITLE__ {{IP_PBX_Manual|sortkey=Table of Contents}}<br />
<center><br />
'''IPitomy IP PBX Administrator Guide'''<br />
</center><center>All materials in this documentation are proprietary and considered confidential to IPitomy Communications, LLC and may not be disclosed without the express written permission of IPitomy Communications, LLC. © 2012 IPitomy Communications, LLC All rights reserved.</center><center>'''IPitomy Communications, LLC'''</center><center>Phone: 941.306.2200</center><center>Email: [mailto:info@ipitomy.com info@ipitomy.com]</center><center>[http://www.ipitomy.com/ www.ipitomy.com]</center><center>Corporate Offices:</center><center>1940 Northgate Blvd.</center><center>Suite B-1</center><center><br />
Sarasota, FL 34234<br />
</center><br />
{| align="center" border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1"<br />
|-<br />
| <br />
= '''Table of Contents'''<br/> =<br />
<br />
*[[IPPBX IMM Intro|'''IPitomy's IP PBX (Intro)''']]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM Getting Started|'''Getting Started''']]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM DataNetworkConfig|'''Data Network Configuration''']]<br />
*[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdmin|'''System Administration Intro''']]<br />
*[[IPPBX IMM AdminSystemNetworking|'''System Networking''']]<br />
*[[IPPBX IMM AdminProviders|'''Providers''']]<br />
*[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminDestinationsIntro|'''Destinations Intro''']]<br />
**[[IP PBX Manual Extensions|Extensions]]<br />
***[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminDestinationsExtAddDel|Add Del]]<br />
***[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminDestinationsExtProvAutoDiscovery|Auto Discovery]]<br />
***[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminDestinationsExtEditPhoneSettings|Phone Configuration settings]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminDestinationsGroups|Groups]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminDestinationsMenus|Menus]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminDestinationsConferences|Conference]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminDestinationsVM|Voice Mail]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminDestinationsSchedules|Schedule]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminDestinationsBranchOffices|Branch Offices]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM Scheduled Calls|Scheduled Calls]]<br />
*Applications<br />
**[[Call Recording]]<br />
**[[Alerts]]<br />
*[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminCallRouting|'''Call Routing''']]<br />
*'''PBXSetup'''<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminDestinationsGroups|Agents]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminPBXSetupGeneralM|General]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminPBXSetupDatabase|Database]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminPBXSetupVM|Voicemail]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminPBXSetupSIPSetup|SIP Setup (Global)]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminPBXSetupPhone Global|Phone Global]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminPBXSetupPrompts|Prompts]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminPBXSetupMOH|Music On Hold]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminPBXSetupFeatureCodes|Feature Codes]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminPBXSetupServices|Services]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminReporting|Reporting]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminReporting|Reports]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminDiagnostics|Diagnostics]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminMonitoring|Monitoring]]<br />
**Queue Monitoring<br />
*Web Applications<br />
**[[Smart Personal Console]]<br />
*Desktop Applications<br />
**[[Desktop Call Manager|Desktop Call Manager]]<br />
**Queue Manager<br />
*Diagnostics<br />
**Network<br />
**Packet Capture<br />
*Appendicies<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminAppendix1KeyTypesCodes|Appendix 1 Key Types, Codes]]<br />
**[[HD Phones|Appendix 2 HD Phones]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminAppendix3SoftPhones|Appendix 3 Soft Phones]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminAppendix4IPAddresses|Appendix 4 IP Addresses]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminAppendix5DHCPSettings|Appendix 5 DHCP Settings]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminAppendix6RouterConfiguration|Appendix 6 Router Configuration]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminAppendix7NetworkConsole|Appendix 7 Network Console]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminAppendix8SoftwareUpgrade|Appendix 8 Software Upgrade]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminAppendix9AastraPhones|Appendix 9 Aastra Phones]]<br />
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminAppendix10TroubleShooting|Appendix 10 Troubleshooting]]<br />
*[[IPPBX IMM Glossary|Glossary]]<br />
<br />
|}</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=Alerts&diff=2178
Alerts
2013-06-03T21:14:26Z
<p>Nichole: /* Create Alerts */</p>
<hr />
<div>Alerts can be set up to allow notifications to be sent out when a certain number is dialed as an outgoing call, such as 911. Alerts allow a large community to be informed about about the outbound dial quickly. These notifications can be sent as an email, text message, and as an alert tone over the phone system. The alerts can be configured to be sent to only certain extensions or to all extensions. <br />
<br />
This alert notification can be sent out to cell phones as well as computers.<br />
<br />
[[File:sms.png]]<br />
===Create Alerts===<br />
<br />
[[File:alertdetail.png|center]]<br />
{|class="wikitable"<br />
!Sections/Fields <br />
!Description<br />
|-<br />
|colspan="2"|'''Alert General Settings'''<br />
|-<br />
|Alert Name <br />
|Enter what the alert will be called<br />
|-<br />
|Enable/Disable this Alert <br />
|Enabling this alert will allow for notifications to be sent when the desired number is dialed. Disabling this alert will not allow for this function. If you would like notifications to be sent out when a certain outbound number is dialed, be sure to have this feature enabled.<br />
|-<br />
|Enable/Disable Text Notifications for this Alert <br />
|Enabling text notifications will allow chosen recipients to be alerted via their QManager text messages. Disabling this feature will not allow QManager notifications.<br />
|-<br />
|Enable/Disable Email Notifications for this Alert <br />
|Enabling email notifications will allow emails to be sent out to chosen recipients when the alert is set off. <br />
<br />
This feature can also send alerts to cell phones as a text message if the recipient has a free gateway service through their cell phone provider such as “@vtext.com” that Verizon provides. <br />
(How to send SMS Messages [[http://wiki.ipitomy.com/wiki/How_to_send_SMS_Messages]])<br />
<br />
Disabling this feature will not send alerts to email or cell phones.<br />
|-<br />
|Enable/Disable Scheduled Call Notifications for this Alert <br />
|Enabling Scheduled Call notifications sends out an alert tone of your choice to the desired phone extensions. This feature does not require the recipient to be near their computer or phone to receive the alert notification.<br />
Disabling this alert will not allow the tone to be sent out to desired extensions.<br />
|-<br />
|Next Destination to Route Caller (non-outbound) <br />
|When using alerts as a destination, callers who have dialed a specific DID that is routed to the alert or pressed a single digit in a menu that is routed to an alert can combine sending a call and announcing the call with email, text, or external audio messaging. <br />
<br />
An example of applying this feature would be in a retail store. If an employee dials for a certain department, there can be notifications sent out via email, text, or audio notifications through out the store alerting the next available employee in the desired department. <br />
|-<br />
|colspan="2"|'''Alert Text to be Displayed with this Notification'''<br />
|-<br />
|Email Subject Text <br />
|Enter the desired alert text that will be sent out via email or text message as the subject heading<br />
|-<br />
|Email/Text Message Body <br />
|Enter what will be sent out in the alert message to email addresses or text alerts. <br />
<br />
%DNID: the number that has been dialed out<br />
%CALLERID: the extension ID that has dialed the number<br />
%TIME: the date and time the number was dialed<br />
|colspan="2"|Client Text Alerts<br />
|-<br />
|Extensions <br />
|All of the extensions that are part of your system are displayed here. Highlight the ones that you would like to send text alerts to over the QManager application and click add.<br />
|-<br />
|QManager Recipients <br />
|The extensions that you see here are the extensions that will receive text alerts over the QManager application.<br />
|-<br />
|colspan="2"|'''Email Alerts'''<br />
|-<br />
|Email Address <br />
|Enter the email address that you would like to receive email alerts for this notification and click add.<br />
|-<br />
|Email Recipients <br />
|The addresses you see here are the recipients of the email notifications for this alert.<br />
|-<br />
|colspan="2"|'''Scheduled Call Alerts'''<br />
|-<br />
|Scheduled Calls <br />
|The extensions that you see here are the extensions that will receive text alerts through an audio notification over their phone.<br />
|-<br />
|Applied to Alert <br />
|The extensions that you see here are the extensions that will receive text alerts through an audio notification over their phone.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<br />
'''To create an alert: '''<br />
#Navigate to the Alerts page under the Destinations tab.<br />
#Click on Create New Alert.<br />
#Enter the Alert Name.<br />
#Enable the the Alert and any notification system you would like to use.<br />
#Add any extensions you would like to be notified when this Alert is set off for text alerts in the QManager, email, and scheduled call alerts.<br />
#Click on [[File:Savechanges.png]].<br />
<br />
===Edit Alerts===<br />
<br />
This will allow you to enter the outgoing number that will set off the alerts as well as the notification message you wish to go out with this alert. <br />
<br />
[[File:editoutgoingroute.png|center]]<br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
!Sections/Fields <br />
!Description<br />
|-<br />
|colspan="2"|'''Edit Outbound Route'''<br />
|-<br />
|Route Name <br />
|The name of the outbound route for the alert<br />
|-<br />
|Route Type <br />
|The type of outbound route that the alert is. For example, if the alert is for 911, then it would be an emergency outbound route.<br />
|-<br />
|Start Pattern <br />
|This field allows you to enter the patter of digits that would first be entered to set off the alert system.<br />
|-<br />
|Digits <br />
|This field allows you to enter the length of the number that would be dialed for the alert.<br />
|-<br />
|Exact Length <br />
|This gives you a drop down menu that includes yes or no options. The number that is entered can be exactly number of digits that has been specified in the previous field or not.<br />
|-<br />
|Trunks <br />
|See Outgoing Call Routing [[http://wiki.ipitomy.com/wiki/IP_PBX_Manual_Call_Routing#Outgoing_Call_Routing]]<br />
|-<br />
|Assign Alert Notification <br />
|This drop down menu will give you options for the alert notifications you have created when creating an alert. select the notification that is appropriate for the alert. <br />
|}<br />
<br />
#Under the Call Routing Tab, navigate to the Outgoing page.<br />
#Click on the Outbound Route that you would like to edit.<br />
#Enter the route name, start patter, digits, exact length, and select an alert notification for this alert.<br />
#Click on [[File:savechanges.png]].</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=Alerts&diff=2177
Alerts
2013-06-03T21:11:19Z
<p>Nichole: Created page with "Alerts can be set up to allow notifications to be sent out when a certain number is dialed as an outgoing call, such as 911. Alerts allow a large community to be informed abou..."</p>
<hr />
<div>Alerts can be set up to allow notifications to be sent out when a certain number is dialed as an outgoing call, such as 911. Alerts allow a large community to be informed about about the outbound dial quickly. These notifications can be sent as an email, text message, and as an alert tone over the phone system. The alerts can be configured to be sent to only certain extensions or to all extensions. <br />
<br />
This alert notification can be sent out to cell phones as well as computers.<br />
<br />
[[File:sms.png]]<br />
===Create Alerts===<br />
<br />
[[File:alertdetail.png|center]]<br />
{|class="wikitable"<br />
!Sections/Fields <br />
!Description<br />
|-<br />
|colspan="2"|'''Alert General Settings'''<br />
|-<br />
|Alert Name <br />
|Enter what the alert will be called<br />
|-<br />
|Enable/Disable this Alert <br />
|Enabling this alert will allow for notifications to be sent when the desired number is dialed. Disabling this alert will not allow for this function. If you would like notifications to be sent out when a certain outbound number is dialed, be sure to have this feature enabled.<br />
|-<br />
|Enable/Disable Text Notifications for this Alert <br />
|Enabling text notifications will allow chosen recipients to be alerted via their QManager text messages. Disabling this feature will not allow QManager notifications.<br />
|-<br />
|Enable/Disable Email Notifications for this Alert <br />
|Enabling email notifications will allow emails to be sent out to chosen recipients when the alert is set off. <br />
<br />
This feature can also send alerts to cell phones as a text message if the recipient has a free gateway service through their cell phone provider such as “@vtext.com” that Verizon provides. <br />
(Link how to send SMS Messages)<br />
<br />
Disabling this feature will not send alerts to email or cell phones.<br />
|-<br />
|Enable/Disable Scheduled Call Notifications for this Alert <br />
|Enabling Scheduled Call notifications sends out an alert tone of your choice to the desired phone extensions. This feature does not require the recipient to be near their computer or phone to receive the alert notification.<br />
Disabling this alert will not allow the tone to be sent out to desired extensions.<br />
|-<br />
|Next Destination to Route Caller (non-outbound) <br />
|When using alerts as a destination, callers who have dialed a specific DID that is routed to the alert or pressed a single digit in a menu that is routed to an alert can combine sending a call and announcing the call with email, text, or external audio messaging. <br />
<br />
An example of applying this feature would be in a retail store. If an employee dials for a certain department, there can be notifications sent out via email, text, or audio notifications through out the store alerting the next available employee in the desired department. <br />
|-<br />
|colspan="2"|'''Alert Text to be Displayed with this Notification'''<br />
|-<br />
|Email Subject Text <br />
|Enter the desired alert text that will be sent out via email or text message as the subject heading<br />
|-<br />
|Email/Text Message Body <br />
|Enter what will be sent out in the alert message to email addresses or text alerts. <br />
<br />
%DNID: the number that has been dialed out<br />
%CALLERID: the extension ID that has dialed the number<br />
%TIME: the date and time the number was dialed<br />
|colspan="2"|Client Text Alerts<br />
|-<br />
|Extensions <br />
|All of the extensions that are part of your system are displayed here. Highlight the ones that you would like to send text alerts to over the QManager application and click add.<br />
|-<br />
|QManager Recipients <br />
|The extensions that you see here are the extensions that will receive text alerts over the QManager application.<br />
|-<br />
|colspan="2"|'''Email Alerts'''<br />
|-<br />
|Email Address <br />
|Enter the email address that you would like to receive email alerts for this notification and click add.<br />
|-<br />
|Email Recipients <br />
|The addresses you see here are the recipients of the email notifications for this alert.<br />
|-<br />
|colspan="2"|'''Scheduled Call Alerts'''<br />
|-<br />
|Scheduled Calls <br />
|The extensions that you see here are the extensions that will receive text alerts through an audio notification over their phone.<br />
|-<br />
|Applied to Alert <br />
|The extensions that you see here are the extensions that will receive text alerts through an audio notification over their phone.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<br />
'''To create an alert: '''<br />
#Navigate to the Alerts page under the Destinations tab.<br />
#Click on Create New Alert.<br />
#Enter the Alert Name.<br />
#Enable the the Alert and any notification system you would like to use.<br />
#Add any extensions you would like to be notified when this Alert is set off for text alerts in the QManager, email, and scheduled call alerts.<br />
#Click on [[File:Savechanges.png]]. <br />
<br />
===Edit Alerts===<br />
<br />
This will allow you to enter the outgoing number that will set off the alerts as well as the notification message you wish to go out with this alert. <br />
<br />
[[File:editoutgoingroute.png|center]]<br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
!Sections/Fields <br />
!Description<br />
|-<br />
|colspan="2"|'''Edit Outbound Route'''<br />
|-<br />
|Route Name <br />
|The name of the outbound route for the alert<br />
|-<br />
|Route Type <br />
|The type of outbound route that the alert is. For example, if the alert is for 911, then it would be an emergency outbound route.<br />
|-<br />
|Start Pattern <br />
|This field allows you to enter the patter of digits that would first be entered to set off the alert system.<br />
|-<br />
|Digits <br />
|This field allows you to enter the length of the number that would be dialed for the alert.<br />
|-<br />
|Exact Length <br />
|This gives you a drop down menu that includes yes or no options. The number that is entered can be exactly number of digits that has been specified in the previous field or not.<br />
|-<br />
|Trunks <br />
|See Outgoing Call Routing [[http://wiki.ipitomy.com/wiki/IP_PBX_Manual_Call_Routing#Outgoing_Call_Routing]]<br />
|-<br />
|Assign Alert Notification <br />
|This drop down menu will give you options for the alert notifications you have created when creating an alert. select the notification that is appropriate for the alert. <br />
|}<br />
<br />
#Under the Call Routing Tab, navigate to the Outgoing page.<br />
#Click on the Outbound Route that you would like to edit.<br />
#Enter the route name, start patter, digits, exact length, and select an alert notification for this alert.<br />
#Click on [[File:savechanges.png]].</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Editoutgoingroute.png&diff=2176
File:Editoutgoingroute.png
2013-06-03T21:10:23Z
<p>Nichole: -> Creation failed: Systemcheck showed missing or incorrect configurated, dependent commands!</p>
<hr />
<div></div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Alerts.png&diff=2175
File:Alerts.png
2013-06-03T21:09:34Z
<p>Nichole: -> Creation failed: Systemcheck showed missing or incorrect configurated, dependent commands!</p>
<hr />
<div></div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Alertdetail.png&diff=2174
File:Alertdetail.png
2013-06-03T21:08:47Z
<p>Nichole: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{RMImage<br />
|Filename=File:Alertdetail.png<br />
|CopyrightBy=<br />
|CreationDate=2013/06/03<br />
|Uploader=Nichole<br />
|UploadDate=2013/06/03<br />
|Description=<br />
|Keywords=<br />
|Format=image/png<br />
|RelatedArticles=User:Nichole<br />
}}</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Alertdetail.png&diff=2173
File:Alertdetail.png
2013-06-03T21:08:47Z
<p>Nichole: uploaded a new version of &quot;File:Alertdetail.png&quot;</p>
<hr />
<div></div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Alertdetail.png&diff=2172
File:Alertdetail.png
2013-06-03T21:07:14Z
<p>Nichole: -> Creation failed: Systemcheck showed missing or incorrect configurated, dependent commands!</p>
<hr />
<div></div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Sms.png&diff=2171
File:Sms.png
2013-06-03T21:06:17Z
<p>Nichole: -> Creation failed: Systemcheck showed missing or incorrect configurated, dependent commands!</p>
<hr />
<div></div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=Call_Recording&diff=2170
Call Recording
2013-06-03T20:41:49Z
<p>Nichole: /* Call Recording */</p>
<hr />
<div>This feature allows recording of inbound and outbound calls. Extensions can be put into groups which makes it easier to keep track of calls. There can be jobs that only record inbound calls, outbound calls, or both. <br />
<br />
There are currently 3 main mechanisms for recording calls on an IPitomy IPPBX System.<br />
<br />
#Manual Recordings: &nbsp;<br/><br />
#*Initiated by agent, or Extension User while on call.<br />
#**These recordings are either in Agent Recordings (if they are recordings by an agent taking a queue call). &nbsp;Or they are available in the work folder in the recording extension's mailbox.&nbsp;<br />
#*Initiated by QManager<br />
#**These recordings are available through View Recordings in QManager<br />
#IPitomy Call Recording Application<br />
#*Licensed IPitomy Feature that records all calls on designated destinations.<br />
#Third Party Recording<br />
#*IPitomy has implemented integration with Trivium to support their call recording application.<br />
<br />
[[File:callrecording.png|center]]<br />
<br />
===Create New Recording Job===<br />
<br />
#Navigate to the Call Recording Page under the Applications tab.<br />
#Click Add Recording<br />
#Enter the name of the recording group.<br />
#Add Ring Groups to the recording job that are applicable to the group that you want to be recorded.<br />
#Add Available Routes that you would like to be recorded.<br />
#Click on the [[File:savechanges.png]] button. <br />
<br />
[[File:editrecordingjob.png|center]]<br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
!Sections/Fields <br />
!Description<br />
|-<br />
|colspan="2"| '''Recording Settings'''|align="center"<br />
|-<br />
|Name <br />
|Enter the name of the Recording Job<br />
|-<br />
|Enable <br />
|Option to enable or disable call recording<br />
|-<br />
|Maximum number of recordings <br />
|Enter the maximum amount of calls you would like to have recorded. If the maximum number has been reached, then the old recordings will be deleted to make room for new ones. <br />
|-<br />
|Maximum age of recordings <br />
|Enter the maximum age of recordings. This will delete recordings after a certain period of time. This will clear out old recordings automatically to make room for new recordings.<br />
|-<br />
|Available Ring Groups <br />
|These are the groups that can be selected to include in the recording job<br />
|-<br />
|Selected <br />
|These are the groups that have been added to be included in the recording job. These are the extensions that you will find recordings for when checking this recording job <br />
|-<br />
|Available Routes <br />
|Routes that can be selected to be included in the recording job. When one of these routes is dialed by one of the ring groups selected the call will be recorded.<br />
|-<br />
|Selected <br />
|These are the routes that have been selected to be recorded when dialed by the selected ring groups.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
===Viewing Recording Jobs===<br />
<br />
[[File:managerecordingfiles.png|center]]<br />
<br />
To View the recording jobs and manage or listen to the recorded calls: <br />
#Navigate to the Call Recording page under the Applications tab. <br />
#Click the [[File:viewjobs.png]] icon to view the recording files for the group you wish to view. <br />
#To download/listen to the recording files, click the [[File:downloadbutton.jpg]] button.</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=Call_Recording&diff=2169
Call Recording
2013-06-03T20:41:39Z
<p>Nichole: </p>
<hr />
<div>=Call Recording=<br />
This feature allows recording of inbound and outbound calls. Extensions can be put into groups which makes it easier to keep track of calls. There can be jobs that only record inbound calls, outbound calls, or both. <br />
<br />
There are currently 3 main mechanisms for recording calls on an IPitomy IPPBX System.<br />
<br />
#Manual Recordings: &nbsp;<br/><br />
#*Initiated by agent, or Extension User while on call.<br />
#**These recordings are either in Agent Recordings (if they are recordings by an agent taking a queue call). &nbsp;Or they are available in the work folder in the recording extension's mailbox.&nbsp;<br />
#*Initiated by QManager<br />
#**These recordings are available through View Recordings in QManager<br />
#IPitomy Call Recording Application<br />
#*Licensed IPitomy Feature that records all calls on designated destinations.<br />
#Third Party Recording<br />
#*IPitomy has implemented integration with Trivium to support their call recording application.<br />
<br />
[[File:callrecording.png|center]]<br />
<br />
===Create New Recording Job===<br />
<br />
#Navigate to the Call Recording Page under the Applications tab.<br />
#Click Add Recording<br />
#Enter the name of the recording group.<br />
#Add Ring Groups to the recording job that are applicable to the group that you want to be recorded.<br />
#Add Available Routes that you would like to be recorded.<br />
#Click on the [[File:savechanges.png]] button. <br />
<br />
[[File:editrecordingjob.png|center]]<br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
!Sections/Fields <br />
!Description<br />
|-<br />
|colspan="2"| '''Recording Settings'''|align="center"<br />
|-<br />
|Name <br />
|Enter the name of the Recording Job<br />
|-<br />
|Enable <br />
|Option to enable or disable call recording<br />
|-<br />
|Maximum number of recordings <br />
|Enter the maximum amount of calls you would like to have recorded. If the maximum number has been reached, then the old recordings will be deleted to make room for new ones. <br />
|-<br />
|Maximum age of recordings <br />
|Enter the maximum age of recordings. This will delete recordings after a certain period of time. This will clear out old recordings automatically to make room for new recordings.<br />
|-<br />
|Available Ring Groups <br />
|These are the groups that can be selected to include in the recording job<br />
|-<br />
|Selected <br />
|These are the groups that have been added to be included in the recording job. These are the extensions that you will find recordings for when checking this recording job <br />
|-<br />
|Available Routes <br />
|Routes that can be selected to be included in the recording job. When one of these routes is dialed by one of the ring groups selected the call will be recorded.<br />
|-<br />
|Selected <br />
|These are the routes that have been selected to be recorded when dialed by the selected ring groups.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
===Viewing Recording Jobs===<br />
<br />
[[File:managerecordingfiles.png|center]]<br />
<br />
To View the recording jobs and manage or listen to the recorded calls: <br />
#Navigate to the Call Recording page under the Applications tab. <br />
#Click the [[File:viewjobs.png]] icon to view the recording files for the group you wish to view. <br />
#To download/listen to the recording files, click the [[File:downloadbutton.jpg]] button.</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Managerecordingfiles.png&diff=2168
File:Managerecordingfiles.png
2013-06-03T20:40:46Z
<p>Nichole: -> Creation failed: Systemcheck showed missing or incorrect configurated, dependent commands!</p>
<hr />
<div></div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Editrecordingjob.png&diff=2167
File:Editrecordingjob.png
2013-06-03T20:39:57Z
<p>Nichole: -> Creation failed: Systemcheck showed missing or incorrect configurated, dependent commands!</p>
<hr />
<div></div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Callrecording.png&diff=2166
File:Callrecording.png
2013-06-03T20:39:06Z
<p>Nichole: -> Creation failed: Systemcheck showed missing or incorrect configurated, dependent commands!</p>
<hr />
<div></div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Viewjobs.png&diff=2165
File:Viewjobs.png
2013-06-03T20:36:50Z
<p>Nichole: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=IP_PBX_Manual_PBXSetup_Services&diff=2150
IP PBX Manual PBXSetup Services
2013-05-29T17:39:41Z
<p>Nichole: /* System Functions Section */</p>
<hr />
<div>__NOTITLE__<br />
{{IP_PBX_Manual|sortkey=Services}}<br />
== Services ==<br />
=== System Information Section ===<br />
[[File:servicessysteminfo.png|center]]<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0"<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Sections/Fields'''</center><br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''System Software Version <br/>'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:1.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | This is the software version that is running on the PBX system.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''RAID Status <br/>'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:1.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | Defines the status the system Raid (if it has one). RAID is Redundant Array of Independent Disks. RAID is available in Software and Hardware versions. 1100 and 1200 systems can only deploy SW RAID. 2000 and 5000 systems are typically deployed using Hardware RAID.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Licensed to <br/>'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:1.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | Displays the name of the company the PBX is licensed to.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Licensed extensions <br/>'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:1.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | Displays how many extensions the system is licensed for. If you try to create more extensions they the PBX has licenses, a warning will display to alert you. There are licenses for both IPitomy branded telephones and non-IPitomy branded telephones. Telephones are assigned the correct license automatically.<br/><br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Service Tag<br/>'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:1.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | Unique serial number for the PBX, used when licensing the system.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Host ID<br/>'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:1.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | Unique ID used for licensing the system.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''System Key<br/>'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:1.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | Unique key used for licensing the system.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Download License Info Button <br/>'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:1.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | Clicking this button will save a text file on your PC. This file contains the Unique ID, Serial, and Key of the PBX. Be sure to email this file along with your purchase order when buying additional licenses,<br />
|}<br />
<br />
==== View System Information<br/> ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''PBX Setup=>Services '''page, locate the'''System Information '''section.<br />
#Use the table of settings and their description for an explanation of how the system is configured.<br />
<br />
=== License Information Section ===<br />
<br />
This feature allows you view what licensed features are available on the system. You can upload or download licenses for the PBX applications. You can also assign Call Manager licenses to users. The following section describes how to perform these functions.<br />
<br />
[[File:servicesdownloadlicense.png|center]]<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0"<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Sections/Fields'''</center><br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Features<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:1.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | Defines which additional features are licensed on the system. Available features are:<br />
ACD<br />
<br />
InGenius<br />
<br />
Multisite<br />
<br />
Call Scheduling<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Desktop Call Manager Licenses<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:1.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | Displays how many of each Call Manager member type are licensed on the PBX. Currently '''Operator''' and '''User''' are the only functional license. Clicking the '''Assign User Licenses''' button will open a new window for assigning call manager licenses.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | License File<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:1.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | In this panel you can download the current license file, or upload a new license.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
==== Upload License File ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''PBX Setup=>Services''' page, locate the '''License''' '''Info''' section.<br />
#Click on the '''Browse''' button in that section of the page.<br />
#Specify the location of the file you want to upload, then click '''Upload File''' button.<br />
#The system will log you out of the PBX.<br />
#Log back into the PBX.<br />
#Click on the '''Apply Changes''' link at the top of the page to save the information and commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Download License File ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''PBX Setup=>Services''' page, locate the '''License''' '''Info''' section.<br />
<br />
#'''Click the Download File '''button'''.'''<br />
<br />
#Your browser may prompt you as to where you wish to save the file.<br />
<br />
==== Assign Single User License ====<br />
[[File:servicesassign.png|center]]<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''PBX Setup'''=>'''Services '''page, locate the'''License Info '''section.<br />
#Click the'''Assign User Licenses''' button. The “'''Assign IPitomy User Licenses'''” window appears. Find the name of the extension that you want to assign the license to. Choose the desired license type from the drop-down list (User/Operator).<br />
#Click the '''Submit''' button to save the changes. Click the '''Close''' button to close the active window.<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
If this is the first time a license has been assigned, be sure to return to the servies page and click the '''Restart Call Manager''' button.<br />
<br />
==== Assign Multiple User Licenses ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''PBX Setup=>''''''Services '''page, locate the'''Download License info '''section.<br />
#Click the'''Assign User Licenses''' button. The “'''Assign IPitomy User Licenses'''” window appears. Click on the box (place a checkmark) to the left of each of the extensions that you want to assign the licenses to.<br />
#Scroll down to the button of the page and select the license type (User/Operator) to assign to these extensions.<br />
#Click the '''Submit''' button to save the changes. Click the '''Close''' button to close the active window.<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
=== System Functions Section ===<br />
<br />
This section allows the administrator to restart some or all services in the PBX, as well as clear the Diagnostic log.<br />
<br />
[[File:servicessystemfunction.png|center]]<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0"<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Sections/Fields'''</center><br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Restart PBX Daemon<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | This will stop and restart all asterisk services on the PBX.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000; border-left:0.0069in solid #000000; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000; border-left:none; border-right:0.0069in solid #000000; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''IMPORTANT:''' '''Performing this function will drop all active calls.'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Reboot the PBX<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | This reboot the PBX.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000; border-left:0.0069in solid #000000; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000; border-left:none; border-right:0.0069in solid #000000; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''IMPORTANT:''' '''Performing this function will drop all active calls.'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Restart All Services<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | This will restart all services, including asterisk, drivers, and web services of the PBX.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000; border-left:0.0069in solid #000000; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000; border-left:none; border-right:0.0069in solid #000000; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''IMPORTANT:''' '''Performing this function will drop all active calls.'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Restart CallManager Daemon<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | This will reinitialize Call Manager Sevices. It will drop any active instances of Call Manager.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" |Restart APC UPS Service<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" |update text<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" |Force Hard Disk Check<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | update text<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Clear Diagnostic Log<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | This will clear the Diagnostics logs from the PBX system.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
==== Restart PBX ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''PBX Setup'''=>'''Services '''page, locate the'''System Functions '''section.<br />
#Click on the '''Restart PBX''' button. All asterisk services on the PBX and return you to the '''Services''' page when it is done.<br />
<br />
==== Reboot PBX ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''PBX Setup'''=>'''Services '''page, locate the'''System Functions '''section.<br />
#Click on the '''Reboot PBX''' button. The will perform a software reboot, and require you to log back in when it is done.<br />
<br />
==== Restart Services ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''PBX Setup=>Services '''page, locate the'''System Functions '''section.<br />
#Click on the '''Restart Services '''button. The system will restart all the services that are running and return you to the '''Services''' page when it is done.<br />
<br />
==== Restart Call Manager ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''PBX Setup=>Services '''page, locate the'''System Functions '''section.<br />
#Click on the '''Restart Call Manager''' button. The system will restart process for the CallManager application and return you to the '''Services''' page when it is done.<br />
<br />
==== Clear Diagnostics ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''PBX Setup'''=>'''Services '''page, locate the'''System Functions '''section.<br />
#Click on the '''Clear Diagnostics''' button. The system will clear all the diagnostic messages on the PBX server and return you to the '''Services''' page when it is done.<br />
<br />
=== Load File System ===<br />
<br />
This area is used to load software files when performing an upgrade.<br />
[[File:servicesloadfile.png|center]]<br />
<br/>'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''PBX Setup'''=>'''Services '''page, locate the'''File System '''section.<br />
#Click on the '''Browse''' button in that section of the page.<br />
#Specify the location of the file you want to load. The file must have the .tgz file extension.<br />
#The PBX will load the file, and the PBX will reboot.<br />
#Upon logging in, a prompt declaring the database version does not match will appear, Click '''OK''' and the database will be converted.<br />
#Click on the '''Apply Changes''' link at the top of the page.<br />
<br />
=== TFTP Files ===<br />
This panel allows the administrator to view, load, download, and delete files on the TFTP in the PBX. Typically, the files you would be loading will be phone firmware files.<br />
[[File:servicestftp.png|center]]<br />
==== Load TFTP File ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''PBX Setup=>Services '''page, locate the'''TFTP Files '''section.<br />
#Click on the '''Browse''' button in that section of the page.<br />
#Specify the location of the file you want to load onto the PBX.<br />
<br />
==== Download TFTP File ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''PBX Setup=>Services '''page, locate the'''TFTP Files '''section.<br />
#Click on the blue '''TFTP Files''' link. A listing of the files that have been loaded on the TFTP server will be displayed.<br />
#Click on the blue link for the file you want to download. Your browser may require you to specify the location where you want to download the TFTP file.<br />
<br />
==== Delete TFTP File ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''PBX Setup=>''''''Services '''page, locate the'''TFTP Files '''section.<br />
#Click on the blue '''TFTP Files''' link. A listing of the files that have been loaded on the TFTP server will be displayed.<br />
#Find the name of the file you want to delete from the list.<br />
#Click on the '''Delete''' button. The file is removed from the list and the system will return you to the '''Services''' page.<br />
<br />
=== Log File Settings ===<br />
<br />
This feature allows you indicate whether you want the logs to be written to a file or displayed on the PBX webpage.<br />
[[File:serviceslogfile.png|center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0"<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Sections/Fields'''</center><br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Log to File<br/>'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If selectedthe system will write the log messages to the '''ipitomy.log''' file, accessible by IPitomy Support. Default is '''enabled.'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Display on Page <br/>'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If selectedthe system will display the log messages on the System Diagnostics page, accessable by anyone with Administrator access to the PBX. Default is '''enabled.'''<br />
|}<br />
<br />
==== Select Log File Settings ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''PBX Setup=>Services '''page, locate the'''Log File Settings '''section.<br />
#Select (placing a checkmark in the box) the method that you want the log files to be handled. You can elect to do both, if so desired.<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes.<br />
#Click on the '''Apply Changes''' link at the top of the page to save the information and commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
=== Logging Level Section ===<br />
<br />
This section of the Services page allows you to specify the type of messages that will be captured and available on the '''System Diagnostics''' page.<br />
[[File:serviceslogginglevel.png|center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0"<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Sections/Fields'''</center><br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Information<br/>'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If selectedthe system will log Information level messages.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Warnings<br/>'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If selectedthe system will log Warning level messages.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Errors<br/>'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If selectedthe system will log Error level messages.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''All<br/>'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If selectedthe system will log all the message types above and some other types such as Notice.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
==== Select Logging Level ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''PBX Setup'''=>'''Services '''page, locate the'''Logging Level '''section.<br />
#Select (placing a checkmark in the box) the method that you want the log files to be handled. You can elect to select all the types, if so desired.<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes.<br />
#Click on the '''Apply Changes''' link at the top of the page to save the information and commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
=== Call Event Log Section ===<br />
This allows you to enable web service and indicate the call event logs retention time.<br />
<br />
[[File:calleventlogging.png|center]]<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0;"<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Sections/Fields'''</center><br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Enable Web Service'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If Enabled (set to '''YES'''), the system will allow call events to be polled via the web service.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Password'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the password that will be used to access the call event log files.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Log Retention'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This indicates the number of months that the log files will be retained on the server. Default is '''6''' months.<br />
<br />
|}<br />
==== Set Call Event Logging ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''PBX Setup'''=>'''Services '''page, locate the'''Call Event Log '''section.<br />
#From the '''Enable Web Service''' field, select '''YES''' to enable the system to start polling the event logs. Otherwise, select NO if you do not want the system to perform this function.<br />
#In the '''Password''' field, enter the password that will be used to access the polling service.<br />
#Enter the number of months you want to retain the call event logs in the '''Log Retention''' field.<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes.<br />
#Click on the '''Apply Changes''' link at the top of the page to save the information and commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
=== Automated Phone Firmware Updates ===<br />
This allows you to set the parameters for the system to perform automated firmware updates. Currently, when enabled, the PBX will check at midnight to see if there are more current phone firmware files available, and will download them if they exist.<br />
<br />
<br />
The following table provides the parameters and their descriptions for the Automated Phone Firmware Updates feature.<br />
<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0;"<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Sections/Fields'''</center><br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Enable Firmware Update Service'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If enabled (set to '''YES'''), then the system will perform an automated check for firmware updates.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Interval'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This allows you to indicate how often the system will check for new firmware. Available internals are Daily, Weekly or Monthly.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Check for Firmware Now'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This allows you to check for firmware on demand.<br />
<br />
|}<br />
==== Set Automated Firmware Update Parameters ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''PBX Setup'''=>'''Services '''page, locate the'''Automated Phone Firmware Updates '''section.<br />
#Set the parameters defining if the system should automatically check for firmware, and the interval is should check.<br />
#Click the button to save the changes.<br />
#Click on the '''Apply Changes''' link at the top of the page to save the information and commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Check for New Firmware Now ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''PBX Setup'''=>'''Services '''page, locate the'''Automated Phone Firmware Updates '''section.<br />
#Click on the '''Check Now''' button. The system will display the results once the process is complete. The following is a sample of what the message that will be displayed. This message demonstrates that the firmware version in the PBX and at IPitomy match.</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Servicessystemfunction.png&diff=2149
File:Servicessystemfunction.png
2013-05-29T17:37:42Z
<p>Nichole: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{RMImage<br />
|Filename=File:Servicessystemfunction.png<br />
|CopyrightBy=<br />
|CreationDate=2013/05/29<br />
|Uploader=Nichole<br />
|UploadDate=2013/05/29<br />
|Description=<br />
|Keywords=<br />
|Format=image/png<br />
|RelatedArticles=User:Nichole<br />
}}</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Servicessystemfunction.png&diff=2148
File:Servicessystemfunction.png
2013-05-29T17:37:42Z
<p>Nichole: uploaded a new version of &quot;File:Servicessystemfunction.png&quot;: updated</p>
<hr />
<div></div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=IP_PBX_Manual_PBXSetup_SIP&diff=2147
IP PBX Manual PBXSetup SIP
2013-05-29T17:33:57Z
<p>Nichole: /* SIP Advanced Settings Section */</p>
<hr />
<div>__NOTITLE__<br />
{{IP_PBX_Manual|sortkey=SIP}}<br />
== SIP Setup<br/> ==<br />
<br />
'''This page defines global SIP configuration parameters.'''<br />
<br />
=== SIP Networking Settings Section ===<br />
[[File:sipnetworksettings.png|center]]<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0"<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Sections/Fields'''</center><br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Local Network & Subnet Masks'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | This is the IP address to the local network and associated subnet masks.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Delete Selected'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Allows you to delete the item selected from list of networks.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Add Local Network'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Allows you to add local network information. This information will appear in the list of networks.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''External IP'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | The public IP address associated with the SIP network.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Add Button'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | This button will create/add the network information to the list of local network section.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
==== Add SIP Networking Settings ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''PBX Setup->SIP '''page, locate the '''SIP Networking Settings '''section.<br />
#Enter the IP Address and Subnet Mask for the network the PBX is being installed on.<br />
#Click the Add button.<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]] button.<br />
#Click on the '''Apply Changes''' link at the top of the page to save the information and commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Delete SIP Networking Settings ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''PBX Setup->SIP '''page, locate the '''SIP Networking Settings '''section.<br />
#Highlight the listing you wish to delete. You can use Shift/Ctrl click functionality to select multiple listings.<br />
#Click the Delete Selected button.<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]] button.<br />
#Click on the '''Apply Changes''' link at the top of the page to save the information and commit the changes to the database<br />
<br />
=== SIP Advanced Settings Section ===<br />
<br />
Advanced SIP settings define in more detail the management of network traffic. These settings are automatically provisioned when the system registers with the router. In most business implementations it is not necessary to make changes to these defaulted settings<br />
<br />
[[File:sipadvset1.png|center]] [[File:sipadvset2.png|center]] [[File:sipadvset3.png|center]]<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0"<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000; border-left:0.0069in solid #000000; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000; border-left:none; border-right:0.0069in solid #000000; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''IMPORTANT:''' '''The default settings for the SIP configuration should not require any changes. If it is necessary for you to do so to meet your customer’s business requirements, we recommend that you contact IPitomy’s Technical Support for assistance.'''<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0"<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Sections/Fields'''</center><br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Description/Default Parameters'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Call Context<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''INCOMING'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Allow Guest Calls<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''YES'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Host/Domain Name<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''BLANK'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | UDP Port<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''5060'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Bind Address<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''0.0.0.0'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Enable DNS SRV Lookup<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''NO'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Domains<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''BLANK'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Allow External Invites<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''YES'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Auto Domain<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''N/A'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Enable Pedantic Checking<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''N/A'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | SIP TOS<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default is '''CS3'''. To configure QOS on your LAN, set your managed switches to prioritize packets flagged with CS3<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | RTP TOS<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default is '''CS3'''. To configure QOS on your LAN, set your managed switches to prioritize packets flagged with CS3<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Video TOS<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default is '''CS3'''. To configure QOS on your LAN, set your managed switches to prioritize packets flagged with CS3<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Max Length of Registration<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''7200'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default Length of Registration<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''3600'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Notify Mime Type<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''BLANK'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Time Between Mailbox Checks<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''BLANK'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Voicemail Extension<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''BLANK'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | SIP Video Support<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''YES'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Record History of Default<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''N/A'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | First disallow all Codecs<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''ALL'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Allow Codecs<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''G.711 ulaw, G.711 alaw, GSM'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default Music on Hold<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | This will display whatever playlist is set to default on the PBX Setup=>Music On Hold page<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Relax DTMF Handling<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''YES'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | RTP Keep-Alive<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | update text<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | RTP Timeout<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default is '''BLANK'''. Set to a value, in seconds, if you wish the PBX to end a call when no RTP traffic is detected for that long. Typically used in regards to lines that are not disconnecting correctly.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | RTP Timeout on Hold<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''BLANK'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Trust Remote Party ID<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''N/A'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Send Remote Party ID<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''N/A'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Progress in Band<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''BLANK'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | User Agent<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''BLANK'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Allow Redirect to Non-local SIP Address<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''N/A'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | User = Phone<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''N/A'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | DTMF Mode<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''AUTO'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Compact SIP Headers<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''N/A'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | SIP Debug<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''N/A'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Subscriber Context<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''BLANK'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Notify Ringing<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''YES'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Qualify<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: 8000<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Generate Manager Events<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''YES'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | External Host<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default is '''BLANK'''. When the site is using a dynamic public IP, you can go to dyndns.com, set up a domain with them, and enter that domain name here.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | External Host Refresh<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default is '''BLANK'''. Set this under the interval used at dyndns.com for checking the current IP.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | NAT<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''YES'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Insecure<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''VERY'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Can Reinvite<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''N/A'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Cache Realtime Friends<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''YES'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Real Time Update<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''N/A'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Auto-Expire Friends<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''N/A'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Ignore Registration Expiration<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''N/A'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Allow External Domains<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Default: '''YES'''<br />
|}<br />
<br />
==== Edit Advanced SIP Networking Settings ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''PBX Setup->SIP '''page, click on the '''Advanced '''link.<br />
#The '''Advanced SIP Networking Settings''' page is displayed.<br />
#Set the '''SIP Network''' parameters base on your business requirements or what is recommended by IPitomy. <p>The default settings should not require any changes. If it is necessary for you to do so to meet your customer’s business requirements, we recommend that you contact IPitomy’s Technical Support for assistance.. </p><br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]] button.<br />
#Click on the '''Apply Changes''' link at the top of the page to save the information and commit the changes to the database.</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=IPPBX_IMM_Scheduled_Calls&diff=2146
IPPBX IMM Scheduled Calls
2013-05-29T16:10:56Z
<p>Nichole: /* Scheduled Calling */</p>
<hr />
<div>__NOTITLE__<br />
<br />
=== Scheduled Calling<br/> ===<br />
<br />
This is a licensed feature that allows for periodic automated calls to be made by the PBX. This can be used for announcements, bells, alarms etc.<br />
<br />
[[File:scheduledcalling.png|center]]<br />
<br />
'''Enabling Scheduled Calling'''<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the PBX Setup=>Services page, locate the Scheduled Calling section.<br />
#Change the dropdown to Enabled.<br />
#Click the button to save the changes.<br />
#Click on the '''Apply Changes''' link at the top of the page to save the information and commit the changes to the database<br />
<br />
<br/><span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span><span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span><span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span><span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span><span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span><span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span><span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span><span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span><span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span><span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span><span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span><span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span><span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span><span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span><span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span><span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span><span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span><span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span><br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0"<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Sections/Fields'''</center><br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''<span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span>Select'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Use this column to select which multiple entries to delete or edit.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''<span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span>Enabled'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Displays if the entry is active.<br />
1: Enabled<br />
<br />
0: Disabled<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''<span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span>Name'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Displays the name of the Scheduled Call.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''<span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span>Start'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Displays the date which a particular entry is set to start.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''<span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span>End'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Display the date which a particular entry is set to end<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''<span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span>Interval'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Displays information on when the Scheduled Call will take place.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''<span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span>Execute'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Shows the time the Scheduled Call will happen.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''<span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span>Target'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Displays the '''Number to Call''' as defined in the Scheduled Call.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''<span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span>Destination'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Displays the '''Number to Connect''' as defined in the Scheduled Call.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''<span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span>Can Dial'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Event can be triggered by dialing a number<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Click to edit individual entries.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Click to test an individual entry. A call between the Target and Destination will be established.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Click to delete individual entries.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''<span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span>Edit'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Click to edit multiple entries if checked in the Select column.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''<span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span>Delete'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <br />
Click to delete multiple entries if checked in the Select column.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''<span style="display: none" data-cke-bookmark="1">&nbsp;</span>Add'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Click to create a new Scheduled Call.<br/><br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0"<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center><br />
'''Sections/Fields'''<br />
</center><br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Name'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Enter a name to identify this Scheduled Call.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Date/Time'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Define what date and time the Scheduled Call should start and end. You do not need to set an end time.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Recurrence'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Defines the interval the Scheduled Call will take place. Calls can be set to Daily, Weekly, or Monthly. See the Recurrence table below for more details.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Execute At'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Defines the time the call will take place for each Recurrence.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Number to Call'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Defines the entity that will be called.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Number to Connect'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Defines what destination the called party will be connected to.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Extension for COS'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Set this to the extension number that is using the Class of Service you wish this Scheduled Call to use when making outbound calls.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: left" | '''Can Dial'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Permits this scheduled call to be dialed. Checking the box enables this scheduled call to become a destination.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''To trigger event Dial'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | (Required) The number to dial to trigger this event.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Security PIN'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | (Optional) Numbers only. If set, when the trigger number is dialed, the system will prompt for this PIN before executing the event. Leave blank if no PIN is needed.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Next Destination'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | (Optional) The destination the call continues on to. Leave blank if you want to end the call when the event is triggered.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Enable/Disable'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Choose Enable for this Scheduled Call to be active, and Disable for it to be inactive.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0"<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Sections/Fields'''</center><br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Daily'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Everyday:''' Will call at the defined Time every day.<br />
'''Every X Days:''' Will call at the defined Time every (1-1550) days.<br />
<br />
'''Every Weekday:''' Will call at the defined Time every M-F.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Weekly'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Every X Weeks on Y:''' Will call at the defined Time every (1-1550) weeks on the day defined.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-width: 0.0069in medium 0.0069in 0.0069in; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 255) -moz-use-text-color rgb(0, 0, 255) rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center" | '''Monthly'''<br/><br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Day:''' Will call at the defined Time every (1st-31st) day of the month.<br />
'''The X Week on Y:''' Will call at the defined Time on the 1<sup>st</sup>, 2<sup>nd</sup>, 3<sup>rd</sup>, or 4<sup>th</sup> week of the month on the day defined.<br />
<br />
'''Every X Months:''' Will call at the defined Time every (1-31) months.<br />
<br />
|}<br />
<br />
'''Adding a New Scheduled Call'''<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''PBX Setup=>Services '''page, locate the Scheduled Calling section.<br />
#If enabled, click the button for Manage Calls, which will take you to the '''List of Scheduled Calls''' page.<br />
#Click the '''Add''' button.<br />
#Configure your new Scheduled Call. If errors are made, you can click '''Rese'''t to start over.<br />
#Click '''Submit''' to save.<br />
#Click the blue link Back to Services to return to the '''PBX Setup=>Services '''page.<br />
#Click the button to save the changes.<br />
#Click on the '''Apply Changes''' link at the top of the page to save the information and commit the changes to the database<br />
<br />
'''Edit a Scheduled Call'''<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Navigate to the List of Scheduled Calls page.<br />
#Click the icon to edit an individual entry, or place a check next to multiple entries and click the '''Edit''' button.<br />
#Make the necessary changes.<br />
#Click '''Submit''' to save.<br />
#Click the blue link Back to Services to return to the '''PBX Setup=>Services '''page.<br />
#Click the button to save the changes.<br />
#Click on the '''Apply Changes''' link at the top of the page to save the information and commit the changes to the database<br />
<br />
'''Edit a Scheduled Call'''<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Navigate to the List of Scheduled Calls page<br />
#Click the icon to delete an individual entry, or place a check next to multiple entries and click the '''Delete''' button.<br />
#Click the blue link Back to Services to return to the '''PBX Setup=>Services '''page.<br />
#Click the button to save the changes.<br />
#Click on the '''Apply Changes''' link at the top of the page to save the information and commit the changes to the database<br />
<br />
'''Test a Scheduled Call'''<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Navigate to the '''List of Scheduled Calls''' page.<br />
#Click the button to test the call connection immediately.<br />
#If the call does not work to your end users desires, reconfigure the Scheduled Call and test again.</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Scheduledcalling.png&diff=2145
File:Scheduledcalling.png
2013-05-29T16:10:28Z
<p>Nichole: -> Creation failed: Systemcheck showed missing or incorrect configurated, dependent commands!</p>
<hr />
<div></div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=IP_PBX_Manual_Branch_Offices&diff=2144
IP PBX Manual Branch Offices
2013-05-29T16:08:43Z
<p>Nichole: /* Branch Offices */</p>
<hr />
<div>__NOTITLE__ {{IP_PBX_Manual|sortkey=Branch Offices}}<br />
<br />
== Branch Offices ==<br />
<br />
Branch Offices provide a powerful tool for interconnecting PBX Systems. Through Branch Offices you can create a network of systems where dialing phones on remote systems is as easy as dialing local extensions. You can route calls inbound to a destination on any branched PBX, and outbound through the trunks of other systems networked in this way. Branch office extensions can even participate in ring groups.<br />
<p>[[File:Samplebranchoffice.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0"<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000; border-left:0.0069in solid #000000; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''IMPORTANT: Branch Offices communicate using IAX2 protocol over Port 4569. Refer to the Port Forwarding Configuration Table earlier in this manual for more information.'''<br />
|}<br />
[[File:editbranchoffice.png]]<br />
{| style="border-spacing: 0px" class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| <center>'''Sections/Fields'''</center><br />
| <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center" | '''Name<br/>'''<br />
| The name that is associated with the branch office. Both sites involved in the Branch Office connection must use the same Name.<br />
NOTE: This field will not allow spaces in the name. It must be all one word. Symbols can be used (i.e. underscore “_” dashes “-”, etc.) can be used in place of spaces.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center" | '''Host<br/>'''<br />
| Enter the static IP of the system your PBX is connecting to. If they do not have a static IP address, enter the word dynamic.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center" | '''Dial Prefix<br/>'''<br />
| The dial prefix must be an asterisk, plus two numbers (ie. *22). This prefix must be dialed to reach any destination on another PBX that has not been entered as a Branch Extension.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center" | '''Password<br/>'''<br />
| This is the password that will allow access to the PBX. Both sites involved in the Branch Office connection must use the same Password.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center" | '''Register<br/>'''<br />
| YES - Only used if the Host is set to dynamic.<br />
NO - does not require that the branch office register with the PBX system.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center" |''' Enable As Trunk '''<br />
| YES - Branched PBXs are able to dial calls out your PBXs trunks.<br />
NO - Branched PBXs are not able to dial calls out your PBXs trunks.<br />
|-<br />
|style="text-align: center" | '''Trunk Settings'''<br />
|update text<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center" | '''Enable Multisite Manager Connection<br/>'''<br />
| Defines if Multi-Site Call Manager functionality is enabled. This feature requires a license from IPitomy to be functional.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center" | '''Qualify<br/>'''<br />
| The time in milliseconds that the PBX should check that the branch office is still online. Setting this to zero may increase Branch Office stability.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center" | '''Enable IAX2 Trunking<br/>'''<br />
| Indicates whether to use IAX trunking. If enabled (YES), this setting can help eliminate packet overhead by cutting the cost of continuous communication.<br/><br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center" | '''Allow Codecs<br/>'''<br />
| Defines what codecs this branch office can use for calls. Priority for codecs are defined from top to bottom.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center" | '''Class of Service<br/>'''<br />
| Allows for individual Branch Offices to use different COS. Setting to None will follow the default Branch Office COS defined under PBX SetupGeneral.<br/><br />
|}<br />
[[File:branchofficepage.png]]<br />
===Configuring Office 1===<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Click on '''Destinations->Branch Offices'''. The '''Branch Offices''' page is displayed.<br />
#Click on the '''ADD office''' button. The '''Edit Branch Office''' page appears.<br />
#Give a unique '''NAME''' for the connection. The name should only contain alpha-numeric characters and no spaces. It should be '''ONE WORD ONLY'''.<br />
#Enter the '''External IP''' of the PBX in the '''Host''' field.<br />
#Enter a unique '''DIALING PREFIX''' of an asterisk followed by two numbers.<br />
#Give a unique '''PASSWORD''' for the connection.<br />
#Select '''NO''' for '''REGISTER '''(Note: that registration is not required if host is known).<br />
#Configure '''Enable Trunking '''as needed.<br />
#Configure '''Enable Multisite Manager Connection''' as needed.<br />
#Set '''QUALIFY''' at '''0'''.<br />
#Configure '''Enable IAX2 Trunking''' as needed.<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database<br />
<br />
===Configuring Office 2===<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Click on '''Destinations->Branch Offices'''. The '''Branch Offices''' page is displayed.<br />
#Click on the '''ADD Office''' button. The '''Edit Branch Office''' page appears.<br />
#Enter a name in the '''NAME''' field that matches that given to the Office 1 PBX. The name should only contain alpha-numeric characters and no spaces. It should be '''ONE WORD ONLY'''.<br />
#Enter an '''external''' '''IP address''' or '''domain''' corresponding to the IP of the main office PBX in the '''HOST''' field.<br />
#Enter a '''UNIQUE''' dialing prefix for the extensions connected to the Office 2 PBX.<br />
#The '''PASSWORD''' for Branch Office 2 needs to be the '''same''' as the one assigned in the Branch Office 1 PBX.<br />
#Select '''NO''' for '''REGISTER'''.<br />
#Configure '''Enable Trunking '''as needed.<br />
#Configure '''Enable Multisite Manager Connection''' as needed.<br />
#Set '''QUALIFY''' at '''0'''.<br />
#Configure '''Enable IAX2 Trunking''' as needed.<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database<br />
<br />
To setup additional Branch Offices in the PBX, use the steps outlined above. Keep in mind to use the same logic (pattern) and make sure that the dialing prefix is unique to each office.<br />
<br />
=== Edit Branch Office<br/> ===<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Destinations->Branch Office '''page, locate the schedule name that you want to edit.<br />
#Click on [[File:penciledit.png]] icon to the right of the '''Name '''of the Branch Office you want to update. The '''Edit Branch Office '''page appears.<br />
#Edit the necessary parameters to configure the branch office.<br />
#Click the [[File:Savechanges.png]] button to save the changes.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database<br />
<br />
=== Delete Branch Office<br/> ===<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Destinations->Branch Offices '''page, locate to the '''Name''' from the Branch Office listing that you want to remove.<br />
#Click on [[File:deleteselected.png]] icon to the right of the '''Name '''of the '''Branch Office''' you want to delete. The Branch Office is removed from the listing page.<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database<br />
<br />
=== '''Branch Extensions'''<br/> ===<br />
<br />
Branch Extensions are created through the add extension field at the bottom of the branch office edit page. Branch extensions can be dialed directly without a prefix, provided that these extensions are properly configured on the PBX for which the branch extensions are defined. Branch extensions will appear in call routing drop down lists throughout the system after they are created. If needed, you can add Ring Group and Menu numbers as Branch Extensions.<br />
<br />
==== Configuring Office 2 with Branch Extensions<br/> ====<br />
[[File:branchextensions.png]]<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Click on '''Destinations->Branch Offices. '''The Branch Offices page appears.<br />
#Click on the '''Branch Office''' connection ('''Name''') assigned to Office 1.<br />
#Assuming Office 1 has extension numbers 100 thru 110, enter the numbers 100 to 110 in the field above the Add button then click '''ADD'''. You will enter (add) each extension one at a time. '''Note: Using the format X-Y will add all extensions in the specified range.'''<br />
#If the extension number is valid (not already in use), the new extension will appear in the list of Branch Extensions.<br />
#Click the [[File:Savechanges.png]] button to save the changes.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
#Verify the new extension by calling the number from phones located (registered) at Branch Office 2.<br />
<br />
To place a call from one Branch Office to another simply dial the prefix that was assigned to that locations PBX + the extension of the user trying to be reached at the other office. This same easy concept works for transferring calls from one Branch Office to another. Or, if you have the extension configured as a Branch Extension on your PBX, you can simply dial the extension number and it will be automatically routed to the branch.<br />
<br />
==== View Branch Office Extensions<br/> ====<br />
[[File:Showextensionspage.png]]<br />
<br><br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Destinations'''->'''Branch Office '''page, click on the '''Show Extensions''' button located at the top of the Branch Office list page.<br />
#A popup window appears displaying all the extension information for each Branch Office that is currently in the system.<br />
#Click on the “'''X'''” to close the popup window.</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Editbranchoffice.png&diff=2143
File:Editbranchoffice.png
2013-05-29T16:07:06Z
<p>Nichole: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{RMImage<br />
|Filename=File:Editbranchoffice.png<br />
|CopyrightBy=<br />
|CreationDate=2013/05/29<br />
|Uploader=Nichole<br />
|UploadDate=2013/05/29<br />
|Description=<br />
|Keywords=<br />
|Format=image/png<br />
|RelatedArticles=User:Nichole<br />
}}</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Editbranchoffice.png&diff=2142
File:Editbranchoffice.png
2013-05-29T16:07:06Z
<p>Nichole: uploaded a new version of &quot;File:Editbranchoffice.png&quot;: update</p>
<hr />
<div></div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=IP_PBX_Manual_Destinations_Menus&diff=2141
IP PBX Manual Destinations Menus
2013-05-29T16:01:30Z
<p>Nichole: /* Edit Menu */</p>
<hr />
<div>== Menus ==<br />
Menus direct callers to destinations within a business. A menu can route a caller to a destination once a number on a key-pad has been pressed. The menu prompt tells a caller what number to press to get to a desired destination. Menus can also be used to provide information to callers like driving directions, etc.<br />
[[File:menuspage.png]]<br />
=== Edit Menu ===<br />
[[File:editmenupage.png]]<br />
{| style="border-spacing: 0px;" class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| '''Sections/Fields'''<br />
| colspan="2" | '''Description'''<br />
|-<br />
| colspan="2" style="text-align: center;" | '''Name'''<br />
| Enter a name for the menu.<br />
|-<br />
| colspan="2" style="text-align: center;" | '''Menu Number (dial to go to menu)'''<br />
| This is the number of the menu. This number is used to access the menu from extensionsif necessary. The number must be a unique 3 or 4 digit number.<br />
|-<br />
| colspan="2" style="text-align: center;" | '''Default Menu Prompt&nbsp;'''<br />
| This is the recording that is active for callers who reach this menu when the Menu Prompt is set to default.<br />
|-<br />
| colspan="2" style="text-align: center;" | '''Active Menu Prompt'''<br />
| This function is enhanced in version 3.4.1. (Previously “Menu Prompt”.) As it indicates, this selection determines what prompt recording is heard by callers who reach this menu.<br />
Record this first under PBX SetupPrompts.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| colspan="2" | <p style="text-align: center;">'''Control Menu Prompt:'''</p><p style="text-align: center;">'''Copy To'''</p><br />
| The Copy To function allows you to place pre-recorded (and previously uploaded, see: PBX SetupPrompts) prompts into the available Prompts to be associated to this menu. Available “slots” are 1-5 where the user may then select 0-5, 0 being the default and 1-5 being those that are loaded. The user also has the ability to rerecord the prompts 1-5 via DTMF Administration access.<br />
Note: uploaded prompts are “copied” to the menu; therefore rerecorded prompts do not overwrite the original uploaded file.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| colspan="2" style="text-align: center;" | '''Fail Over'''<br />
| This is the destination that the menu will fail over to if the user does not press a digit in the allotted Response Time.<br />
|-<br />
| colspan="2" style="text-align: center;" | '''Override Hold Musc'''<br />
| update text<br />
|-<br />
| colspan="2" style="text-align: center;" | '''Hold Music'''<br />
| update text<br />
|-<br />
| colspan="3" style="border: 0.0069in solid rgb(0, 0, 255); padding: 0in 0.075in; text-align: center;" | '''Assign Menu Destinations'''<br />
|-<br />
| colspan="2" style=text-align: center;" | '''Menu Destinations&nbsp;'''<br />
|This list represents the destinations callers are routed to when pressing 0-9,*, <nowiki>#, and FAX. </nowiki>If a destination is set for FAX, the PBX will detect if a call inbound over an Analog or T1/PRI card is a fax while the prompt is playing, and will route calls to this destination if fax tone is detected.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
==== Add Menu Settings ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Destinations'''=>'''Menus '''page, click the '''ADD''' menu button. The '''Edit Menu''' page appears.<br />
#Enter the information for the new Menu item and make necessary destination assignments.<br />
#Click button the [[File:savechanges.png]]to save the changes.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database<br />
<br />
==== Edit Menu Settings ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Destinations'''=>'''Menus '''page, locate the name of the Menu item you want to edit.<br />
#Click on [[File:penciledit.png]] icon to the right of the '''Name '''of the menu you want to update. The '''Edit Menu''' page appears.<br />
#Make the necessary updates to the menu setting then click [[File:savechanges.png]] button.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database<br />
<br />
==== Delete Menu Settings ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Destinations'''=>'''Menus '''page, locate the name of the Menu item you want to edit.<br />
#Click on {File:deleteselected.png]] icon to the right of the '''Name '''of the menu you want to delete. The Menu name is removed from the Menu listing.<br />
#Click [[File:savechanges.png]] button.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Advanced Menu Settings ====<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0;"<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;" | <center>'''Sections/Fields'''</center><br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;" | <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;" | Response Timeout <br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.5in;padding-right:0.075in;" | This is the number of seconds (0-60) the PBX will wait for digits to be dialed. If nothing is dialed in the allotted time, the menu will route the call to the Failover Destination. The minimum and default value is '''4'''.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;" | Digit Timeout <br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.5in;padding-right:0.075in;" | While entering digits, the PBX will wait this many seconds (1-20) after the last digit was entered to take any actions. Single decimal digits are permitted. The default value is '''2'''.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;" | Play the Greeting <br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.5in;padding-right:0.075in;" | This is the number of times the greeting will be played before the call is sent to the fail over destination. Default and minimum value is '''1'''.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;" | Local extension dialing<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.5in;padding-right:0.075in;" | This indicates whether you are able to dial local extensions from the menu. Default value is '''YES.'''<br />
Note: It is not necessary to designate leading digits for extensions. This setting alone indicates when digits collected should be compared to the available list of extensions.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;" | Prompt Padding<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.5in;padding-right:0.075in;" | This is the time in seconds that the PBX will wait when entering the menu before playing the prompt. The default is set to '''2''' seconds.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;" | Enable Admin PIN <br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.5in;padding-right:0.075in;" | This enables the use of DTMF Menu Prompt Administration. When enabled the user may access the menu from a DTMF-enabled device and input the PIN to enter into Menu Prompt Administration Default value is '''No'''.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;" | Admin PIN<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.5in;padding-right:0.075in;" | <nowiki>This is the PIN used to access DTMF Menu Prompt Administration. Default value is: <empty>.</nowiki><br />
|}</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Editmenupage.png&diff=2140
File:Editmenupage.png
2013-05-29T15:57:51Z
<p>Nichole: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{RMImage<br />
|Filename=File:Editmenupage.png<br />
|CopyrightBy=<br />
|CreationDate=2013/05/29<br />
|Uploader=Nichole<br />
|UploadDate=2013/05/29<br />
|Description=<br />
|Keywords=<br />
|Format=image/png<br />
|RelatedArticles=User:Nichole<br />
}}</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Editmenupage.png&diff=2139
File:Editmenupage.png
2013-05-29T15:57:51Z
<p>Nichole: uploaded a new version of &quot;File:Editmenupage.png&quot;: updated</p>
<hr />
<div></div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=IP_PBX_Manual_Destinations_Groups&diff=2138
IP PBX Manual Destinations Groups
2013-05-29T15:53:31Z
<p>Nichole: /* Ring Group Advanced Settings */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{IP_PBX_Manual|sortkey=Groups}}<br />
'''Groups'''<br />
<br />
A Group is a logical grouping of extensions and their privileges. Each Group is associated with a set of PBX features and call routing strategies. It is advised to build the extensions in the PBX first, allowing the groups to be populated at the time of creation.<br />
<br />
These Groups allow incoming calls to be distributed to a group of extensions rather than just one extension. Within the Groups, different distribution strategies may be selected based on the call coverage required by the application. Groups also provide off-hook paging functionality. By dialing the intercom button or code followed by the group number, extensions in the group will receive the page over the intercom. Groups are a set of extensions that are related either because they:<br />
<br />
* Serve a similar business function.<br />
* Work within the same department.<br />
* Are located in proximity to each other.<br />
<br />
For example, a business might create a few user Groups in an IP telephony network, e.g. Sales, Marketing, Administration, Accounting, Engineering, etc. Groups may also be created for people in similar locations like a plant floor, the north section of a building or the front office. The goal of a group is to ring telephones based on the incoming routing logic (e.g. DIDs, Auto Attendant selected by the incoming caller, or time of day). Note that calls routing to an extension from a ring group will ignore that phones PBX forwarding settings. Some phones have forwarding settings which are independent of the PBX (not set through the PBX Web GUI). These settings will still be applied.<br />
[[File:ringgroupspages.png|center]]<br />
<br />
=== Ring Group Examples ===<br />
Ring groups define a set of extensions (people) that answer calls. Ring groups can be created for departments (e.g. Sales, Engineering) or buisiness regions (e.g. north, south, etc), or areas of a business (e.g. a warehouse or plant floor). These ring groups can appear on an Automated Attendant (menu). When the group is selected from a Menu, the call is routed to the group. These calls will be distributed to the member extensions based upon the ring strategy for the group. The ring strategy for the group can be set from the drop-down list. Available call distribution options are:<br />
<br />
* Ring AllRing all extensions in the group simultaneously<br />
* Round RobinTake turns ringing each extension, starts at the first extension for each new call<br />
* Round Robin (with memory)Take turns ringing each extension, starts where the last call left off<br />
* Least RecentRing extensions in order of which was least recently called by the queue. If using agents, logging out will reset the call counter so the next time that agent logs in, they will be at the top of the list for queue calls.<br />
* Fewest CallsRing extension in order of which has the fewest completed calls from the queue<br />
* RandomRandomly ring one extension at a time<br />
<br />
==== Example Ring Group 1Departmental Grouping ====<br />
Ring group definitions can be found in the '''Add a New Ring Group''' section of this guide. If a business has the following departments and people: This business can setup the following ring groups supporting business operations.<br />
<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0;"<br />
| style="background-color:#4f81bd;border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''GROUP 1 - Sales'''<br />
| style="background-color:#4f81bd;border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Ext.'''<br />
| style="background-color:#c0504d;border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''GROUP 2Customer Services'''<br />
| style="background-color:#c0504d;border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Ext.'''<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Cathy Caldwell<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| 123<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Gretchen Goodall<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| 134<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| David Dawson<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| 124<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Peter Polk<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| 135<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Susan Smith<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| 125<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Robert Reed<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| 126<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <br />
<br />
|}<br />
Using this ring group scenario the '''Menu would look like''':<br />
<br />
* Sales (Destination - Group 1).<br />
* Customer Service (Destination - Group 2).<br />
* Office Manager (Destination - Ext. 113).<br />
<br />
The menu prompt (message) for this menu and group arrangement would read as follows:<br />
<br />
'''“Thank you for calling CompanyA, a leading manufacturer of cable assemblies and wiring harnesses. If you know the extension of the party you would like to reach you may dial it at any time.”'''<br />
<br />
* For Sales, press 1.<br />
* For Customer Service, press 2.<br />
* For Accounting, press 3.<br />
<br />
Once a call is sent to Sales, member extension will be rang according to the '''ring group strategy.'''<br />
<br />
==== Example Ring Group 2Regional Sales Grouping ====<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0;"<br />
| style="background-color:#4f81bd;border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''GROUP 1 East Coast Sales'''<br />
| style="background-color:#4f81bd;border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Ext.'''<br />
| style="background-color:#c0504d;border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''GROUP 2 -West Coast Sales'''<br />
| style="background-color:#c0504d;border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Ext.'''<br />
| style="background-color:#9bbb59;border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''GROUP 3 Customer Service'''<br />
| style="background-color:#9bbb59;border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Ext.'''<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Cathy Caldwell<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| 123<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Susan Smith<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| 125<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Gretchen Goodall<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| 134<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| David Dawson<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| 124<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Robert Reed<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| 126<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Peter Polk<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| 135<br />
<br />
|}<br />
Using this ring group scenario the '''Menu would look like''':<br />
<br />
* East Coast Sales (Destination - Group 1).<br />
* West Coast Sales (Destination - Group 2).<br />
* Customer Service (Destination - Group 3).<br />
* Office Manager (Destination - Ext. 113).<br />
<br />
The menu '''prompt '''for this menu and group arrangement would read as follows:<br />
<br />
'''“Thank you for calling CompanyA, a leading manufacturer of cable assemblies and wiring harnesses. If you know the extension of the party you would like to reach you may dial it at any time. For”'''<br />
<br />
* East Coast Sales, press 1.<br />
* West Coast Sales, press 2.<br />
* Customer Service, press 3.<br />
* Accounting, press 4.<br />
<br />
Calls sent to these groups might use different ring strategies. The East Coast Sales group might answer calls Round Robin, distributing the calls to each Sale Representative consecutively. If a sales person is missing from the West Coast team this group might set phones to Ring All in the group so that calls don’t get missed. The Customer Service team may get high volumes of calls during a specified period of time, so this group may be set to ring Least Recent.<br />
<br />
==== Add/Edit New Ring Group ====<br />
[[File:editringgroup.png|center]]<br />
The following table describes the parameters (fields) on the Edit Ring Group page and their descriptions and recommended settings.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
{| border="1" class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| <center>Sections/Fields</center><br />
| <center>Description</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Name'''<br/><br />
| The name associated with this ring group.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''&nbsp;Group Number (to dial group)'''<br/><br />
| The number dialed to access this ring group. Must be 3 or 4 digits.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Allow Paging with **+Group Number'''<br/><br />
| If enabled (checked), this will allow <nowiki>**+ </nowiki>group number to page this ring group<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Ring Strategy'''<br/><br />
| This defines how calls are distributed to member extensions. Options are:<br />
'''Ring All''' - Ring all extensions in the group simultaneously<br />
<br />
'''Round Robin''' - Ring extensions consecutively. Delivers a new call to the first person in the group only after the last person in the group has taken a call. If an extension is busy the call will automatically be routed to the next extension in the group.<br />
<br />
'''Round Robin (with memory)''' - Ring extensions consecutively. Delivers a new call to the first person in the group only after the last person in the group has taken a call. Remembers where the last call was taken and distributes new calls to the next extension in the rotation.<br />
<br />
'''Least Recent''' - Ring extensions in order of which was least recently called by the queue.<br />
<br />
'''Fewest Calls''' - Ring extension in order of which has the fewest completed calls from the queue<br />
<br />
'''Random''' - Distributes calls randomly to the group.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Failover Destination'''<br/><br />
| This defines where a call will be sent when it goes unanswered for a duration that matches the Timeout for the group.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Timeout'''<br/><br />
| Defines, in seconds, the total time a call will spend in the ring group before being sent to the Failover Destination<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Allow Recording'''<br/><br />
| Determines if feature code recording is allowed for calls in this queue.<br />
If YES = enables the recording feature.<br />
<br />
If NO = disables the recording feature.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Agent Ring Time'''<br/><br />
| Defines, in seconds, how long the queue will ring a particular agent. If using the Ring All strategy, this value should match the Timeout. For other strategies, this should be set to how long an extension should ring before moving on to the next.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Autofill'''<br/><br />
| <br />
This deals with how the queue handles multiple concurrent calls. If set to NO the queue will wait until the first call is answered before ringing phones with the second call. If set to YES the queue will ring phones for all calls as they come in.&nbsp; Note this setting has a different effect with ring all that may not be desirable.&nbsp;<br />
<br />
When autofill is yes and ring strategy is 'ringall' the group will still deliver the calls in the order they are received and in order to prevent calls from being lost by phones that have too few lines for the number of calls in the queue, the group will only deliver a single additional call when Ring In Use is set to yes. If someone who's phone is ringing rejects the call, the group will deliver the next call in line to all members.&nbsp; This means the the rejected call is no longer ringing the member's phone that rejected the call, however it is still ringing all of the other members.&nbsp; At the same time the 2nd call in line comes in and rings everyone.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Ring In use'''<br/><br />
| If '''YES''' = Distribute calls to group members if they are already on a call<br />
If '''NO''' = Do NOT distribute calls to group members if they are already on a call<br />
<br />
|}<br />
<br />
The following outlines the steps to add/edit ring group settings.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Destinations'''=>'''Group''' page, click the '''ADD Group''' button. The '''Edit Ring Group''' page appears.<br />
#In the '''Name''' field, enter a name for the group.<br />
#In the '''Group Number''' field, enter a number for the group. This number must be three or four digits in length.<br />
#Check the '''Allow Paging with <nowiki>**+</nowiki> the Group Number''' to enable the setting.<br />
#Select the desired '''Ring Strategy''' from the drop-down list.<br />
#Select the desired '''Failover Destination''' from the list of available options.<br />
#Enter the time for the '''Timeout''' parameter.<br />
#Select “'''Yes'''” if you want to enable the '''Allow Recording '''setting. Otherwise, set it to “'''No'''”.<br />
#Enter the time for the '''Agent Ring Time''' parameter.<br />
#Select “'''Yes'''” if you want to enable the '''Autofill '''setting. Otherwise, set it to “'''No'''”<br />
#Select “'''Yes'''” if you want to enable the '''Ring in use '''setting. Otherwise, set it to “'''No'''”<br />
#Click [[File:savechanges.png]] the button.<br />
#From the '''Members''' section of the '''Edit Ring Group''' page, select the extension number from the list of extensions that you want to add to the ring group. Click the '''ADD''' button.<br />
#A second list appears next to the Members list displaying the selected extension. Repeat step 13 until all extensions that you want to add are on the list. Additionally, Shift or Control click functionality works for adding multiple extensions at once.<br />
#To remove an item from the list of additions, select the extension number then click the '''REMOVE''' button.<br />
#Define '''Priorities''' for the extensions, if needed. The scale ranges 0 thru 9 (0 is the highest priority).<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Ring Group Advanced Settings ====<br />
[[File:customcallerid.png|center]]<br />
The following table describes the parameters (fields) on the '''Advanced''' '''Settings''' for Ring Groups page and their descriptions and recommended settings.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| colspan="2" | <center>'''Sections/Fields'''</center><br />
| <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| colspan="3" | <center>'''Ring/Hold Settings'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Caller Hears'''<br />
| colspan="2" | update text<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Override Hold Music'''<br />
| colspan="2" | update text<br />
|-<br />
|style="text-align: center;" | '''Hold Music'''<br />
| colspan="2" | update text<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Ring Tone'''<br />
| colspan="2" | When Caller Ring Settings are set to Ringing, use this to define the ring cadence.<br />
|-<br />
| colspan="3" | <center>'''Custom Caller ID Settings'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Use'''<br />
| colspan="2" | Defines what method, if any, you wish to use to override Inbound CID. The options are:<br />
System Default, Name, Number, Name and Number<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Name'''<br />
| colspan="2" | This is the name of the caller that will be displayed when a call is received.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Number'''<br />
| colspan="2" | This is the number of the caller that will be displayed when a call is received.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Prepend'''<br />
| colspan="2" | Selecting Prepend will enter the text you put in the field, followed by the original CID. If not prepending, the override eliminates the original information.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
==== Edit Advanced Ring Group Settings ====<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
# Select '''Destinations=>Groups'''. The '''Ring Groups''' page appears.<br />
# Select the Ring Group you want to edit by either select the [[File:penciledit.png]] icon to the right of the group name or click on the blue Group Name link.<br />
# The '''Edit Ring Group''' page appears. Scroll down the page and click on the '''Advanced''' link. The '''Advanced Ring Group Settings''' section is displayed.<br />
# Make the necessary changes to the settings then click button [[File:savechanges.png]] to save the changes.<br />
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Edit Custom Caller ID Settings ====<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
# Select '''Destinations=>Groups'''. The '''Ring Groups''' page appears.<br />
# Select the Ring Group you want to edit by either select the [[File:penciledit.png]] icon to the right of the group name or click on the blue Group Name link.<br />
# The '''Edit Ring Group''' page appears. Scroll down the page and click on the '''Advanced''' link. '''The Custom Caller ID''' section is displayed.<br />
# Make the necessary changes to the settings then click [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes.<br />
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Edit Members/Agents ====<br />
[[File:editmembersagents.png|center]]<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| <center>Sections/Fields</center><br />
| <center>Description</center><br />
|-<br />
| Members<br />
| This is the list of available extensions that are in the database.<br />
|-<br />
| Agents<br />
| This is the list of available agents that are in the database.<br />
|-<br />
| Priority<br />
| This field allows you to set the priority level for the members or agents. The lower the number, the higher the priority.<br />
|-<br />
| ADD<br />
| This button will add the select item on the list to the right of the available members or agents. Shift and Control click functionality works for adding more than one at a time.<br />
|-<br />
| REMOVE<br />
| This button will remove the item(s) that have been selected from the list of available members or agents. Shift and Control click functionality works for adding more than one at a time.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
==== Add Agents/Members to the Group ====<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
# Navigate to the '''Destinations=>Groups=>Edit Group''' page.<br />
# Select from the left hand column which agents/members to add to the group.<br />
# Click the '''Add '''button.<br />
# Click [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes.<br />
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database<br />
<br />
==== Delete Agents/Members from the Group ====<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
# STEPS: Navigate to the '''Destinations'''=>'''Groups'''=>'''Edit Group '''page.<br />
# Select from the right hand column which agents/members to remove from the group.<br />
# Click the '''Add '''button.<br />
# Click [[File:Savechanges.png]] button to save the changes.<br />
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database<br />
<br />
=== Automatic Call Distribution ([[ACD]]) ===<br />
<br />
Systems licensed to use [[ACD]] will have access to additional functionality pertaining to Ring Groups. ACD allows for more flexibility and control over the queuing in a Ring Group, as well as allowing the creation of Agents who can be added to the Ring Group.<br />
<br />
[[File:autocalldistpage.png]]<br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| <center>Sections/Fields</center><br />
| <center>Description</center><br />
|-<br />
| Agent Retry Timer<br />
| This defines, in seconds, how long the queue will wait before attempting to ring an agent again.<br />
|-<br />
| Weight<br />
| The priority of the queue in relation to other queues in the system.<br />
|-<br />
| Wrap-up Time<br />
| This defines, in seconds, how long the queue will wait after an agent has ended a call before flagging then as an active agent ready to accept more calls.<br />
|-<br />
| Autopause<br />
| This will place an agent in a pause state in relation to this queue when they ignore or answer a call. To become an active member of the queue again unpause using the 1* feature code a phone or 1*+agent# for an agent.<br />
|-<br />
| Maximum # of people in queue<br />
| Defines how many callers can join the queue before it is considered full.<br />
|-<br />
| Announce Frequency<br />
| Must be set for Announce Holdtime to function. This pertains to how often the caller will hear the hold time announcement, in seconds<br />
|-<br />
| Periodic Announce Frequency<br />
| This defines how much time passes between playing the recording that was set for this queue under Periodic Announcement.<br />
|-<br />
| Announce Holdtime<br />
| If set to YES this will announce a caller’s status in the queue with regards to their expected hold time, pending the hold time is estimated to be over 1 minute. If the hold time is less than one minute, this will announce the caller’s position in the queue. A period of time is needed for the algorithm to ‘learn’ and estimate hold times accurately. This message will not play for the first caller in the queue. Caller Ring Settings must be set to a MOH file in order for this message to play.<br />
|-<br />
| Join Empty Queue<br />
| Controls if a caller can join a queue.<br />
YES = Callers can join the queue with no members or whose members are busy.<br />
<br />
NO = Callers can only join the queue with active, non-busy members.<br />
<br />
STRICT = Callers can join the queue as long as there are active members, be they available or busy.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| Leave Empty Queue<br />
| Controls if a caller will leave an empty queue.<br />
YES = Callers will leave the queue if there are no active members, or all members are busy.<br />
<br />
NO = Callers will not leave the queue even if there are no active members, or all members are busy.<br />
<br />
STRICT = Callers will leave the queue if there are no active members, but will remain in the queue if all members are busy.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| Report Hold Time<br />
| Set to YES if you want the person answering the queue call to hear a message indicating how long the call they just answered was in the queue<br />
|-<br />
| Member Delay before connect<br />
| Delay, in seconds, before a member is connected to the queue.<br />
|-<br />
| Timeout Restart<br />
| If set to YES the ring group timeout will reset after attempting to ring an agent/member. When set to NO, time taken to ring an agent/member will be subtracted from the ring group time, and when the timer ends the group will send the caller to the Failover Destination<br />
|-<br />
| Service Level<br />
| Set this to the time, in seconds, that defines the acceptable level of service for the queue. The Live Queue Data page will track the percentage of calls answered within the allotted time.<br />
|-<br />
| Exit Status: FULL<br />
Exit Status: JOINEMPTY<br />
<br />
Exit Status: LEAVEEMPTY<br />
<br />
Exit Status: JOINUNAVAIL<br />
<br />
Exit Status: LEAVEUNAVAIL<br />
<br />
| These are the destinations where calls will go based on the exit strategy defined. If no one in the group accepts the call this is the destination to which the call will be sent. Destinations can be extensions, other ring groups, a menu or a voicemail box.<br />
|-<br />
| Intro Announcement<br />
| Define what prompt to play to the caller just before they enter the queue. (Previously “Announce Filename”)<br />
|-<br />
| Agent Announcement<br />
| Defines what prompt to play to the agent/member who answers the queue call. This setting is set per Queue and therefore can be used to identify what Queue is being answered (for agents handling calls from multiple Queues.<br />
|-<br />
| Periodic Announcement<br />
| Defines what prompt to play to the caller at the Periodic Announce frequency interval. This will not play for the caller in the first position of the queue. Caller Ring Settings must be set to a MOH file in order for this message to play.<br />
|-<br />
| Exit Menu<br />
| Set this to a menu. Key presses while in this group will send people the corresponding destination from that menu.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
''Table 39Edit Ring Group ACD Agents Settings and Descriptions''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
==== Edit Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Settings ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Destinations'''=>'''Groups=>Edit Group '''page, scroll to the '''ACD Settings''' section.<br />
#Make the necessary updates to the ACD settings.<br />
#Click [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Add Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Agents ====<br />
[[File:addeditagentfeatures.png]]<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| <center>Sections/Fields</center><br />
| <center>Description</center><br />
|-<br />
| Name<br />
| Enter a name that will identify this agent.<br />
|-<br />
| ID<br />
| Enter a unique 3-4 digit number to identify this agent. This number is used to log in/out.<br />
|-<br />
| PIN<br />
| Enter a minimum of 4 digits for the PIN. This is the password used to log in/out with the agent.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
''Table 40Add/Edit Agent Features and Descriptions''<br />
<br />
<br/>'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Destinations'''=>'''Groups=>Edit Group '''page, scroll to the '''ACD Settings''' section.<br />
#Click on the blue '''Agents''' link to the right of the words '''ACD Settings'''. The Agents page appears.<br />
#Click on the '''ADD''' button to add a new agent. A box with the name, ID and PIN field appears. Enter the information for the new agent.<br />
#Click [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Edit Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Agent ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Destinations''' '''Groups Edit Group '''page, scroll to the '''ACD Settings''' section.<br />
#Click on the blue '''Agents''' link to the right of the words '''ACD Settings'''. The '''Agents''' page appears.<br />
#Update the necessary information for agent(s) then click the '''SAVE CHANGES''' button. The changes that you made will appear in the updated list.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database<br />
<br />
==== Delete Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Agent ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Destinations'''=>'''Groups=>Edit Group '''page, scroll to the '''ACD Settings''' section.<br />
#Click on the blue '''Agents''' link to the right of the words '''ACD Settings'''. The '''Agents''' page appears.<br />
#From the list of existing agents, click on the box (placing a checkmark) to the left of the Agent(s) that you want to delete. Click the '''DELETE SELECTED''' button.<br />
#The agent selected is removed from the list.<br />
#Click [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
=== Multicast Paging Group ===<br />
<br />
A Multicast Paging Group provides a way to page a large number of phones, while keeping the burden on the network and PBX to a minimum.<br />
<br />
'''NOTE: IPitomy recommends using multicast paging for groups of 10 or more phones that are paged frequently.'''<br />
[[File:multicastgroups.png|center]]<br />
[[File:editmultipagewindow.png|center]]<br />
<br/>The following table describes the fields (parameters) on the Multicast Edit Paging Group window and the recommended settings.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| <center>Sections/Fields</center><br />
| <center>Description</center><br />
|-<br />
| Name<br />
| This is a name of the multicast paging group.<br />
|-<br />
| Local Number<br />
| This is the number that will be dialed to launch the multicast paging to the defined group. This is the unique 3-4 digit number.<br />
|-<br />
| Multicast Address<br />
| This should be a valid multicast IP for a Multicast Address&lt;ref name="ftn1"&gt;224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255, with many addresses reserved.&lt;/ref&gt;. We recommend '''225.5.5.5'''. You can use the same IP for each group, so long as you assign them different ports.<br />
|-<br />
| Multicast Port<br />
| This must be a valid, unused port Multicast Port.<br />
'''NOTE: This must be a port below 6535.'''<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| Time to Live<br />
| Time to Live is a counter that decreases by 1 each time a packet passes through a router. When the counter reaches 0, the packet is considered dead and will not pass to any other networks. This can be left blank or configured as needed for your particular install.<br />
'''NOTE: Leaving it blank the packet will not pass to another network.'''<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| Members<br />
| The Members section allows you to add the extensions to be paged within the group when a page is sent.<br />
|-<br />
| Add/Remove<br />
| The Add and Remove button allows you to add or remove members (extensions) from the paging group.<br />
|-<br />
| Create/Update<br />
| Depending on the process that is being performed, this button will appear (be labeled) as either Create or Update. This will create a new member or process the changes made.<br />
|-<br />
| Close Window<br />
| This link will close the Edit Page Group window and return you to the Ring Groups page.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
The following section outlines the steps to add a new Multicast Paging Group.<br />
<br />
==== Add Multicast Paging Group ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Navigate to the '''Destinations'''=>'''Group '''page<br />
#Locate to the '''Multicast Paging Groups''' section (at the bottom of the page).<br />
#Click on the '''Add Groups '''button. The '''Edit Page Group''' page appears.<br />
#Enter the necessary information for the new paging group.<br />
#From the '''Members''' section of the '''Edit Page Group''' window, select the members (extensions) that you want to include in the paging group.<br />
<br />
Use the CTRL or SHIFT button to select multiple or a range of extensions from the list.<br />
<br />
#Click on the '''ADD''' button to add the selected members to the group.<br />
#Click the '''CREATE''' button to save the changes. The “Group Created” message appears. Close the window (click on the “X”). The system returns you to the '''Ring Groups''' page.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database<br />
#'''Re-boot''' the phones that correspond to extensions that were added to the '''Multicast Paging Group'''. Once all the phones have been re-booted, you will be able to utilize this feature by simply dialing the Local Number that was just created.<br />
<br />
==== Edit Multicast Paging Group ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Navigate to the '''Destinations'''=>'''Group '''page<br />
#Locate the '''Multicast Paging Groups''' section (at the bottom of the page).<br />
#Click on [[File:penciledit.png]] icon to the right of the '''Name '''of the paging group you want to update. The '''Edit Page Group''' page appears.<br />
#Enter the necessary information for the paging group.<br />
#Click the '''UPDATE''' button to save the changes. Close the window (click on the “X”). The system returns you to the '''Ring Groups''' page.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database<br />
#'''Re-boot''' the phones for all the extensions that were involved in the Multicast Paging Group.<br />
<br />
==== Delete Multicast Paging Group ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Navigate to the '''Destinations'''=>'''Group '''page<br />
#Locate the '''Multicast Paging Groups''' section (at the bottom of the page).<br />
#Click on [[File:deleteselected.png]] icon to the right of the '''Name '''of the paging group you want to delete. The group is removed from the '''Multicast Paging Group''' page.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database<br />
#'''Re-boot''' the phones for all the extensions that were involved in the Multicast Paging Group which was deleted.<br />
<br />
=== Live Queue Data ===<br />
<br />
The Live Queue Data page displays current call statistics for ACD queues. The page will refresh every 10 seconds, allowing a manager to monitor the activity in the queue as it happens.<br />
<br />
[[File:ringlivequedata.png|center]]<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing: 0px;" class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| <center>Sections/Fields</center><br />
| <center>Description</center><br />
|-<br />
| &lt;queue selection box&gt;<br />
| In the queue selection box the Queue or Queues to be displayed can be selected. Use the Control key (Command on Mac) to select multiple queues for display.<br />
|-<br />
| &lt;queue statistics box&gt;<br />
| The Queue Statistics box has been reformatted in SW release 3.4.1 to allow its use on call center wall boards (large PC displays).<br />
Each queue is encapsulated with a thin-line box. Queue statistics are color-coded for quick orientation on wall boards. Since this data is presented in GUI format it can be easily resized to accommodate large displays.<br />
<br />
The top line of the queue display presents the Queue Name and the date.<br />
<br />
Statistics are a running total and will reset to zero whenever Apply Changes is clicked (as is the case of the screen capture above).<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| Time in Q<br />
| This is the average time that callers have waited in queue before being answered by a queue member/agent.<br />
|-<br />
| Calls in Q<br />
| This is the number of calls that are waiting in the queue.<br />
|-<br />
| Answered<br />
| This is the number of calls answered by members/agent of this queue.<br />
|-<br />
| Abandoned<br />
| This is the number of calls that have not been answered and the caller abandoned the queue.<br />
|-<br />
| Target Time<br />
| Displays the service level set for this ACD queue. The Service Level is the arbitrary time allocated by the queue administrator which is set as a gauge by which all calls should be answered.<br />
|-<br />
| &nbsp;% in Target<br />
| This is the percentage of answered calls measured against the service level. (The percentage of calls being answered within the set Target Time.)<br />
|-<br />
| &lt;Member/Agent field&gt;<br />
| At the right side of the Queue Statistics box the agents and queue members are listed. There are two maximum columns and the window will resize to accommodate all members and agents registered to this queue.<br />
Member/Agent status is available at a glance with color-codes as follows:<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0;"<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#c00000;border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;" | <center>'''Red'''</center><br />
| style="border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;" | <center><nowiki>=</nowiki></center><br />
| style="border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;" | In Use<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#006600;border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;" | <center>'''Green'''</center><br />
| style="border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;" | <center><nowiki>=</nowiki></center><br />
| style="border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;" | Idle (Logged In)<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#ffff00;border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;" | <center>'''Yellow'''</center><br />
| style="border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;" | <center><nowiki>=</nowiki></center><br />
| style="border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;" | Ringing<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#7f7f7f;border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;" | <center>'''Gray'''</center><br />
| style="border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;" | <center><nowiki>=</nowiki></center><br />
| style="border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;" | Unavailable (Not Logged In)<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#e36c0a;border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;" | <center>'''Orange'''</center><br />
| style="border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;" | <center><nowiki>=</nowiki></center><br />
| style="border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;" | Paused<br />
|}<br />
<br />
Also in the Member/Agent data are two numeral fields. The first number represents the Priority of this Member/Agent in this queue. The second number is the total calls taken by this Member/Agent.<br />
<br />
|}<br />
<br />
=== Live Queue Data Wallboard ===<br />
Software version 3.4.1 and above allows the use of call center wall boards with Live Call Queue. This function is facilitated using a special user name and password via Smart Personal Console.<br />
<br />
==== Activate Live Call Queue Wallboard ====<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
# Navigate to the '''PBX Setup'''=>'''General '''page<br />
# Locate to the '''General Settings''' section (second section from the top).<br />
# Locate the SPC Reports User Password field (bottom of section)<p>[[File:spcreportsuserpass.png]]<p/><br />
# It may be helpful to change this to a user-friendly password. If you change the password be sure to [[File:savechanges.png]] and '''Apply Changes'''.<br />
# Make a note of this password.<br />
# On the PC that will be used for the wallboard display, open a web browser and navigate to the IPitomy PBX login screen<br />
# Using the right sideSmart Personal Console (User Login) input the word “reports” as the user name and the password saved in step 3. [[File:reportslogin.png]]<br />
# Click on '''Login''' .<br />
# The CDR-Report page is opened. On this page is a button to select Live Queue.<br />
# Click on '''Live Queue'''.<br />
# The same display presented in PBX Administration is displayed. Simply select the group or groups that you wish to display on the wallboard.<br />
# Size this web page data output for the monitor in use by pressing and holding the Cntrl key (PC, Command key on Mac) and press “+” or “-“ until the data is sized as you wish.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
----<br />
<references/></div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Customcallerid.png&diff=2137
File:Customcallerid.png
2013-05-29T15:50:11Z
<p>Nichole: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{RMImage<br />
|Filename=File:Customcallerid.png<br />
|CopyrightBy=<br />
|CreationDate=2013/05/29<br />
|Uploader=Nichole<br />
|UploadDate=2013/05/29<br />
|Description=<br />
|Keywords=<br />
|Format=image/png<br />
|RelatedArticles=User:Nichole<br />
}}</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Customcallerid.png&diff=2136
File:Customcallerid.png
2013-05-29T15:50:10Z
<p>Nichole: uploaded a new version of &quot;File:Customcallerid.png&quot;: update</p>
<hr />
<div></div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=IP_PBX_Manual_Destinations_Extensions_AutoDiscovery&diff=2135
IP PBX Manual Destinations Extensions AutoDiscovery
2013-05-29T15:46:34Z
<p>Nichole: /* Advanced Scan Settings */</p>
<hr />
<div>__NOTITLE__ <br />
<br />
<span style="font-size:larger;">'''Auto Discovery of Extensions'''</span><br />
<br />
This network discovery tool will automatically detect new devices that have been added to the network. This feature helps identify phones and other devices connected to the network and allow you to configure networked phones. The IP PBX system provides you with the option to either scan the network, or if a scan has been done recently, you could select No Scan to save time.<br />
[[File:autodiscoverytab.jpg|center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Auto-Discovery<br/> ===<br />
<br />
==== Start Auto-Discovery Scan<br/> ====<br />
<br />
This section describes how to start the Auto-Discovery scan for active devices on the network.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Destination'''=>'''Extensions''' page, click the '''Auto-Discovery Tab'''.<br />
#Select to either Scan or Not Scan the network and an Alert message indicating that the system is scanning the network for active devices appears.<br />
#Once the scanning process is complete, the system will display a list of active devices and assigned values such as IP Address, Device Type, Status, etc. Devices that appear on this list may be selected for editing. By default, the PBX will only display IPitomy and Aastra devices. Filter options can be modified to change display other devices.<br />
<br />
If you click the refresh-view more than once within a short time period, the network is not rescanning. The minimum time period allowed between scans is indicated under the Advanced Settings (Min Refresh Interval).The network is only scanned for new information when you click REFRESH. Both REFRESH and FILTER ONLY apply whatever filters you have chosen to the displayed list.<br />
<br />
==== List of Devices & Extensions<br/> ====<br />
<br />
The list of discovered network devices comes from two sources:<br />
<br />
*Network<br />
*PBX Database<br />
[[File:autodisccolorlegend.png|center]]<br />
The following table describes the status of devices that will appear once an Auto-Discovery scan is completed.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing: 0px;" border="1"<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Sections/ Fields'''<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| Assigned<br />
| This field indicates that extension that is assigned to the device (phones). Clicking on the box to the left of this field allows you to select it for editing.<br />
|-<br />
| Device<br />
| The Device column lists info about the device. Database info is preferred, so if a device is set to a certain phone type in the database, this is listed instead of the actual device type.<br />
|-<br />
| Status<br />
| This is the status of the device. If the status field is blank, this indicates that the device was not found on the network.<br />
NOTE: Phones that are in the process of restarting, turned-off, or operating on a different network during a network scan will not be in an “Online” status.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| <br />
| Hovering the mouse over this icon will provide device information. See Figure 43 for an example of the data that can be viewed.<br />
|-<br />
| MAC Address<br />
| This is the MAC Address assigned to the device.<br />
|-<br />
| IP Address&nbsp;<br />
| This is the IP Address assigned to the device.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
==== Device Information<br/> ====<br />
<br />
To view detail information for a specific device, hover your cursor over the information icon to obtain details about the network device or phone. This can be an important source of information about which phones are available for live configuration.<br />
[[File:autodiscdevicevalues.png|center]]<br />
<br />
==== Edit Selected Tab<br/> ====<br />
<br />
The IP PBX system offers many ways to configure devices. This section describes an optional method using the Auto-Discovery feature.<br />
[[File:autodisceditselected.png|center]]<br />
<br/>The following table describes the fields and functions available on the Edit Selected Tab of the Auto-Discovery page:<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing: 0px;" border="1"<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Fields'''<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Commands Phone?'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| Create<br />
| Create new extensions for selected phones. You can upload extension details in a file or manually enter information.<br />
| <center>NO</center><br />
|-<br />
| Assign<br />
| Assign existing extensions to selected phones.<br />
| <center>NO</center><br />
|-<br />
| Unassign<br />
| Removes the configuration file for the phone and all association between the extension and the phone.<br />
| <center>NO</center><br />
|-<br />
| Unassign & Default<br />
| Same as Unassign but also sends a Factory Default instruction to the phone.<br />
| <center>YES</center><br />
|}<br />
<br />
===== Create, Assign and Configure Phone =====<br />
<br />
The following outlines steps to create, assign and configure a device.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0"<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000; border-left:0.0069in solid #000000; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000; border-left:none; border-right:0.0069in solid #000000; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''IMPORTANT:''' '''This assumes that the phones are in a FACTORY DEFAULTED state.'''<br />
'''IPitomy recommends using the CSV upload file and the IP550 phone type which will help to simplify the setup and auto configuration process.'''<br />
<br />
|}<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Extensions'''=>'''Destinations'''=>'''Auto-Discovery '''page, click the '''Edit Selected '''tab.<br />
#Place a check mark next to the phones you wish to use when creating the extensions<br />
#Click the '''Create''' button.<br />
#Enter the new extension information. The MAC addresses of the selected phones will be populated so you have a reference as to what phones you are creating the extensions for.<br />
#Click the “'''Create'''” button. If successful, Click “'''Return to Extensions'''”<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the right hand corner of the top of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
#Click the “'''Auto-Discovery'''” button and you will note the newly created extensions are now assigned to the phones that were checked.<br />
#Check the boxes next to the phones that you just created extensions for.<br />
#Click the Commands Tab.<br />
#Click on the '''Configure & Restart''' button to provision the phones.<br />
<br />
==== View Settings Tab ====<br />
<br />
Filtering does not change how the network scanning is performed. It only limits the list of items displayed. This means that if you only want to change filters it is not necessary to re-scan the network. All of the network information from the last network scan is retained and used by filters.<br />
<br />
[[File:autodiscviewsettings.png|center]]<br />
<br />
{| border="1" class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| '''Sections/Fields'''<br />
| <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
| <center>'''Commands Phone'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| '''Select All, None, Invert'''<br />
| Check or uncheck multiple checkboxes with the click of a button.<br />
| <center>NO</center><br />
|-<br />
| '''Refresh'''<br />
| Scan the network for devices. Scanning is done using the settings in Advanced Scan Settings. The scan results displayed depend on the active filters,controlled via Advanced Filter Settings.<br />
| <center>NO</center><br />
|-<br />
| '''Filter Only'''<br />
| Displays results of the last network scan after applying the filters set in Advanced Filter Settings.<br />
| <center>NO</center><br />
|}<br />
[[File:autodiscadvfilterset.png|center]]<br />
===== Advanced Filter Settings =====<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing: 0px;" border="1"<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Sections/Fields'''<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| Sort Order<br />
| This allows you to set what order items are listed. Hover your cursor over the help icon next to the Sort Order fields for options.<br />
|-<br />
| Hide<br />
| Allows you to hide different status types from view.<br />
|-<br />
| Filter Patterns<br />
| Allows you to either enter a partial MAC or IP here. The only system criterion is that the pattern must match from the first character onward. i.e. “000D” would match “000DE” but not “A000DE”.<br />
Full Regular Expression Matching is supported when you enclose your search pattern in double quotes. Some Examples are:<br />
<br />
*Pattern 1.2.3 = ^1\.2\.3<br />
*Pattern “1\.2\.3.*” = 1\.2\.3.*<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| Filter by Type<br />
| You can select multiple device types to filter by. Auto-Discovery is aware of MAC address ranges used by many popular networked devices. Although this is not the only way Auto-Discovery identifies devices, this allows the tool to identify and filter devices by type.<br />
Only IPitomy devices and Aastra phones are shown by default because they are set in the Filter by Type.<br />
<br />
|}<br />
<br />
===== Advanced Scan Settings =====<br />
<br />
Changes to Scan Settings are kept when you click the GUI ‘Refresh’ button. Clicking on your browser’s refresh button will discard changes. For the most part these settings can remain unchanged and all will function as needed.<br />
<br />
[[File:advscansettings.png|center]]<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing: 0px;" border="1"<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Sections/Fields'''<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| Scan Network<br />
| update text<br />
|-<br />
| Port 80 Ping Wait<br />
| Maximum seconds to wait for basic phone web interface to signal that it is alive. Rarely used.<br />
|-<br />
| Command Wait&nbsp;<br />
| Maximum seconds to wait for most commands.<br />
|-<br />
| User and Password<br />
| Phone’s Web User Name & Password may have to be specified if the phone is not using factory default settings for these items. When these fields are blank Auto-Discovery uses default settings.<br />
|-<br />
| Factory Default Wait<br />
| Maximum seconds to wait for the phone to signal completion of a Factory Default.<br />
|-<br />
| Reset<br />
| The ‘Reset’ button will return all Scan Settings to original default values.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
==== Commands Tab ====<br />
<br />
The IP PBX system offers many ways to configure devices. This section describes an optional method using the use Auto-Discovery feature.<br />
[[File:commfunctiontab.png|center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing: 0px;" border="2"<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Sections/ Fields'''</center><br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Commands Phone?'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| Factory Default<br />
| Sends a Factory Default and restarts the phone.<br />
| <center>YES</center><br />
|-<br />
| Restart<br />
| Sends a Restart instruction to the phone.<br />
| <center>YES</center><br />
|-<br />
| Configure & Restart<br />
| Instructs phone to set TFTP server to the Server IP specified under Advanced Settings. Then the phone is commanded to restart, which will result in pulling down configuration files and firmware files if there are updated ones present.<br />
| <center>YES</center><br />
|-<br />
| Assign, Configure, & Restart<br />
| Combines the functions of the Assign button with the Configure & Restart button.<br />
| <center>YES</center><br />
|}<br />
<br />
===== Factory Default Phone =====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Extensions'''->'''Destinations '''page, click the '''Auto-Discovery Tab'''.<br />
#Click the “'''Auto-Discovery'''” button, choosing to scan or not scan the network as needed.<br />
#Click (placing a checkmark) on the boxes next to phones you wish to default.<br />
#From the '''Auto-Discovery''' page, click on the '''Command''' tab. Click the “'''Factory Default'''” button. Wait long enough for the phones to default and restart. This could be anywhere from 30 seconds to 2 minutes for each phone, depending on the model. The phones will set themselves back to factory default and reboot during this period.<br />
<br />
===== Troubleshooting Network Scanning Problems =====<br />
<br />
Scan settings have been configured to work in a standard one subnet network environment. More complicated environments may require further tuning. The most useful setting is ‘Maximum wait’. However noisy environments will require increasing the packet Count and TX interval.<br />
<br />
<br/>'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
To tune scanning for your network:<br />
<br />
#From the '''Extensions'''->'''Destination'''->'''Auto-Discovery''' page, click on '''Advanced Scan Settings''' link.<br />
#Increase the ‘'''Maximum Wait'''’ setting by a few seconds.<br />
#Click the GUI ‘'''Refresh'''’ button.<br />
<br />
More specific tuning will require knowledge of your network and diagnostic tools like Ping.Phones that are in the process of restarting, turned-off, or operating on a different network during a network scan will not be in an “'''Online'''” status.<br />
<br />
===== Auto Provisioning Phone Settings from Actual Device =====<br />
<br />
The remainder of the configuration is done via the Phone interface, and will only work with IPitomy phones.<br />
<br />
<br/>'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Create an extension, setting the Device to either IP550 or IP120, depending on what IPitomy phone you intend to register to the extension.<p>'''IMPORTANT: To configure the phone using the auto provisioning, make sure that the “Auto-Provisioning” parameter is RUNNING. This can be done in PBX Setup=>General option of the system.''' </p><br />
#From your phone, select the Menu button to start Auto-Provisioning then select '''Option 7: SIP Settings '''(you can do this without using the scroll keys by just pressing Menu then 7).<br />
#It will prompt you for the '''Admin''' password. Enter the default password “'''1234'''” then press the Enter softkey (IP550) or the OK button (IP120)<br />
#Select '''Option 8: Auto Prov'''.<br />
#Select “'''YES'''” when the '''Autosearch PBX '''prompt appears.<br />
#'''Enter''' either the '''extension''' number of the extension that has been created.<br />
#Press the Done softkey (IP550) or the OK button (IP120) and the phone will run through the process of downloading its configuration file, updated firmware file, etc.</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Advscansettings.png&diff=2134
File:Advscansettings.png
2013-05-29T15:44:56Z
<p>Nichole: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{RMImage<br />
|Filename=File:Advscansettings.png<br />
|CopyrightBy=<br />
|CreationDate=2013/05/29<br />
|Uploader=Nichole<br />
|UploadDate=2013/05/29<br />
|Description=<br />
|Keywords=<br />
|Format=image/png<br />
|RelatedArticles=User:Nichole<br />
}}</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Advscansettings.png&diff=2133
File:Advscansettings.png
2013-05-29T15:44:56Z
<p>Nichole: uploaded a new version of &quot;File:Advscansettings.png&quot;: updated</p>
<hr />
<div></div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=IPPBX_Manual_System_Admin_Adding_and_Deleting_Extensions&diff=2132
IPPBX Manual System Admin Adding and Deleting Extensions
2013-05-29T15:29:49Z
<p>Nichole: /* Extensions - Voicemail Settings Section */</p>
<hr />
<div>'''Extensions'''<br />
<br />
Extensions define where specific people or departments can be reached in an organization. They should be setup first in the system. The following is a list of the various settings/parameters that will can be updated for each extension. The parameters you configure for the extensions will vary based on the customer’s general business practices.<br />
<br />
*General Settings<br />
*Forwarding Settings<br />
*Advanced Network Settings<br />
*Advanced Voicemail Settings<br />
*Advanced Allow Codecs Settings<br />
*Advanced Calling Permissions<br />
*Advanced Follow-Me<br />
<br />
<br />
=== '''Add/Import Tab'''<br/> ===<br />
<br />
The '''Add/Import '''tab allows you to create new extensions or edit existing extensions.<br />
<br />
<br/>Use the Setup Worksheet to upload the CSV file and automatically create the Extension information. Please refer to the Setup Worksheet section of this guide for details.<br />
<br />
[[File:addimporttab.png|center]]<br />
[[File:createextension.png|center]]<br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| '''Sections/Fields'''<br />
| <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| '''Extension Name'''<br />
| This is the name of the person that the extension will be assigned to (using this device).<br />
|-<br />
| '''Email Address'''<br />
| This is the user’s email address (optional)<br />
|-<br />
| '''Ext. #'''<br />
| The extension number that is assigned to this device.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Device Type'''<br />
| This is the type of device that will be using this extension (i.e. IP550).<br />
|-<br />
| '''MAC'''<br />
| This is the MAC ID of the device (optional).<br />
|-<br />
| '''AutoNumber/Start At'''<br />
| Selecting this option allows you to automatically number the extensions that you need to add. To use this feature, simply enter the extension number you want to start with then select (place a checkmark) the AutoNumber option.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
''Table 15Create Extension Fields and Descriptions''<br />
<br />
==== Add/Create Extensions<br/> ====<br />
<br />
This section describes in detail how to create a new extension.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From any page of the PBX Admin system, click on the button next to the '''Destinations''' link to expand the menu. The '''Destination''' menu opens and displays the options available.<br />
#Click on the '''Extensions''' link. The Extensions page opens and displays a listing of extensions (if ones already exists).<br />
#Click on the box to the left of the '''Extensions '''field. This value defaults to “'''10'''”. Enter the number of extensions you want to add and then click the '''ADD''' button.<br />
#The '''Create Extensions''' page appears displaying the number of rows that was specified. Enter information for the extension in these fields. See table above for details.<br />
#:You can have the system automatically number the extensions you want to create by clicking the '''AutoNumber''' checkbox located on the top left hand corner of the '''Create Extensions''' page.<br />
#Click on the '''CREATE''' button when all the extension information you want to create is entered. The system responds with a message indicating the results of adding the new extension(s). You should see a “'''SUCCESS'''” message.<br />
#If there is an error, you will see an “'''ERROR'''” indicated under the Results field. An error is typically due to an extension number that is being duplicated (already existing in the system). Make the necessary adjustments to correct the error then click the '''CREATE''' button.<br />
#Click on the [[File:savechanges.png]] button, to save the changes.<br />
#Select the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
=== '''Search Tab'''<br/> ===<br />
<br />
This tab allows the user to search the extensions for keywords in the fields: Class of Service, Departments, Name, Numbers, CID Names, CID Numbers, Email, or Status .This section describes in detail how to search for existing extensions.<br />
[[File:searchextensions.png|center]]<br />
<br/>The following table describes the types of search parameters the system will perform.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| '''Sections/Fields'''<br />
| <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| '''Class of Service'''<br />
| This is the class of service that is assigned to the extension(s).<br />
|-<br />
| '''Departments'''<br />
| This is the department that is assigned to the extension(s).<br />
|-<br />
| '''Names'''<br />
| This is the name of the user assigned to the extension(s).<br />
|-<br />
| '''Numbers'''<br />
| This is the extension number.<br />
|-<br />
| '''CID Names'''<br />
| The caller ID name that is associated with the extension(s).<br />
|-<br />
| '''CID Numbers'''<br />
| This is the caller ID number that is associated with the extension(s).<br />
|-<br />
| '''Emails'''<br />
| Email address that is associated with the extension(s).<br />
|-<br />
| '''Status'''<br />
| This is the status of the extension(s).<br />
|-<br />
| '''Match Search Filter'''<br />
| Exactindicates that you want the search to match exactly as the search criteria that is entered.<br />
Partialindicates that you want to partially match the search criteria entered.<br />
<br />
|}<br />
<br />
==== Search Extension<br/> ====<br />
<br />
This section describes how to search for extensions.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Extensions''' page, click the '''Search Tab'''. The list of extensions that are in the system appears with search options at the top section of the page.<br />
#Click the [[File:dropdownlist.png]] drop-down arrow icon next to the '''Class of Service''' list.<br />
<br />
Select the desired '''search criteria''' then enter the parameters in the box to the right of the list then click the '''Search''' button. If the system finds any extensions matching your search parameter, it will display the information in the extensions window.<br />
<br />
If the field is left blank, the system will bring all the extensions.<br />
<br />
=== View Tab (Extensions)<br/> ===<br />
<br />
This tab allows the user to sort the display of extensions by Phone Model. Once sorted, phone key settings can be mass edited for phones of the same model. This section describes in detail how to view existing extensions.<br />
<br />
[[File:extensionsviewpage.png|center]]<br />
<br />
==== Edit or View Extension<br/> ====<br />
<br />
This section describes in detail how to view or edit extension details.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Navigate to the '''Destinations'''=>'''Extensions''' page.<br />
#Select the [[File:penciledit.png]] or the [[File:pencilextensionedit.png]] icon to the right of the extension name you want to view or edit. The pencil edits the PBX settings and the pencil with the handset behind it edits the Phone settings.<br />
#The '''Edit Extensions''' page displays with setting details for the extension.<br />
#Make the necessary changes to the extension.<br />
#Click on the [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the right hand corner of the top of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
You can edit multiple extensions by selecting (placing a checkmark in the box next to extension name). Only the fields being changed (that is common for all extensions selected) will be modifiedi.e. Status or call group, etc.).<br />
<br />
Another shortcut that the system provides you is the '''Previous''' and '''Next''' button located on the top left corner of the '''Edit Extension''' page. Use these buttons to navigate backward or forward to find the extensions you want to view or modify.<br />
<br />
==== Mass Edit PBX Extension Settings<br/> ====<br />
<br />
This section describes in detail how to view or edit extension details.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Destinations'''=>'''Extensions''' page, click on the '''View''' tab. A list of extensions appears.<br />
<br />
You can sort the list by phone model by selecting (placing a checkmark) the'''Phone Model & Settings''' option located in the top left hand corner of the screen. If you are using this method, you can also Mass Edit Phone Key settings. See the section below for steps.<br />
<br />
#Select (place a checkmark) in the box next to the extension name(s) you want to view or edit.<br />
#Click on the '''Edit PBX Settings''' button. The extension details page appears. On the top left corner of the screen, you will see the extension numbers that you are viewing or editing.<br />
#Make the necessary changes to the extension settings then click on the [[File:Savechanges.png]] button to save the changes.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the right hand corner of the top of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Mass Edit Phone Key Settings<br/> ====<br />
<br />
This section of the Administration Guide describes how to mass edit the key settings for extensions using the same phone model.<br />
[[File:masseditfeature.png|center]]<br />
<br/>'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Destinations'''->'''Extensions''' page, click on the '''View '''tab.<br />
#Select the '''Phone Models and Settings''' option at the top left hand corner of the list.<br />
#The system will display a list of the extensions in a grouping of phone types. Select the group of phones you want to edit. A listing of all the extensions in the phone group will appear.<br />
#Select the box next to the name of the extensions you want to update or click on box next to the '''Name''' field at the top of the column to select all the extensions.<br />
#Click the '''Edit Phone Settings''' button. The system will take you to the '''Key Settings''' page for the phones. At the top of the page you will see a list of all the extensions that you are updating.<br />
#By default, the '''Only Save Changed Fields''' option Is selected, de-select if needed.<br />
#Once all the changes are made, select the '''Save and Restart''' '''Phone''' button to save changes and reboot the phones so they can pull down their updated configuration file.<br />
<br />
==== Delete Extension<br/> ====<br />
<br />
This section describes in detail how to delete existing extensions.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Navigate to the '''Destinations'''->'''Extensions''' page<br />
#Select the [[File:deleteselected.png]] icon to the right of the extension name you want to Delete<br />
#The extension is deleted and a confirmation message will appear. Click '''OK''' on the message window.<br />
#The system returns you to the '''Extensions''' page. The extension that was just deleted will no longer appear on the list of extensions.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Delete Multiple Extension<br/> ====<br />
<br />
This section describes in detail how to delete multiple extensions.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Navigate to the '''Destinations'''=>'''Extensions''' page<br />
#Select (place a checkmark) in the boxes next to the extension name(s) you want to delete.<br />
#Click on the Delete All button. The selected extension will be removed from the list and deleted from the database.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
=== Extensions - General Settings Section<br/> ===<br />
<br />
Once the extensions have been added to the database, you can edit the settings for each of the extensions.<br />
<br />
[[File:extensionsgeneralsettings.png|center]]<br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| '''Sections/Fields'''<br />
| <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Name'''<br />
| Name of the user associated with the extensions being created<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Number'''<br />
| Extension number for this person or department. This must be 3 to 4 digits in length<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Email'''<br />
| Email address for the person assigned to the extension. This will allow the system to forward email messages to the address of the person at the extension when properly configured.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Status'''<br />
| Active = currently in use<br />
Disabled = currently not in use<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Class of Service'''<br />
| This is the service type for the extension. When initially created, the PBX will set this to the COS you have definined as the system default class of service on the PBX SetupGeneral Page<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''PIN'''<br />
| This is the number used to access the extensions voicemail and can be between 1 and 6 digits long. The default setting is for the PIN to be the extension number. Be sure to instruct users to change the PIN to avoid unauthorized use.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Ring Time'''<br />
| This is the time in seconds that a call will ring before it is considered unanswered. Ring time must be between 1 and 100 seconds in length.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Call Group'''<br />
| This number assigns this extension to a group with a similar purpose (e.g., Sales or Customer Service). Multiple call groups can be assigned to each extension by putting a comma between the group numbers. The call groups also define which Pickup Groups can answer calls to this extension.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Pickup Group'''<br />
| This number should match any Call Group number entered on an extension. It defines the Call Group Numbers this extension can pickup remotely by pressing 99.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Apply Schedule'''<br />
| When an extension is created, a schedule destination is created automatically. This schedule is not activated until the Apply Schedule box is selected. When it is selected, all calls sent directly to this extension must first pass through the extension’s schedule and will be routed accordingly. Extension schedules will appear with the name of the extension (e.g., Extension 123 would appear as “ext_123”). (See the Schedules section of this guide for more information.)<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''CID Override'''<br />
| If enabled, the user will be able to override the Caller ID settings. When the user places a call, the original assigned CID will be bypassed and the name and number will that is entered in the CID Name and Number fields will be sent instead. Always check with your provider that CID override is allowed before configuring.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''CID Name'''<br />
| If the CID Override parameter is enabled, this is the Caller ID name that will be seen by the recipient when an outbound call is placed. Always check with your provider that CID override is allowed before configuring.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''CID Number'''<br />
| If the CID Override parameter is enabled, this is the Caller ID number that will be seen by the recipient when an outbound call is placed. Always check with your provider that CID override is allowed before configuring.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Detect Fax'''<br />
| If checked, calls from an Analog or T1/PRI card that route direct to this extension will spend a period of time (Defined under PBX SetupGeneral) checking if the call is a fax. During this time, the PBX holds the call; if fax tone is detected, the call will be passed along to the destination defined for Route Fax To, otherwise it will pass the call to the extension after the detection time has expired.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Route Fax To'''<br />
| Define where calls will be routed if fax tone is detected.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
''Table 17General Extension Settings and Descriptions''<br />
<br />
=== Extensions - Forward Settings Section<br/> ===<br />
<br />
The extensions forwarding settings are made to be very user friendly. The settings may be modified from the Smart Personal Console, changed from your telephone extension, or changed remotely from any telephone (including cell phones), using the touch-tone key pad.<br />
[[File:extensionsforwardsettings.png|center]]<br />
<br/>Forward settings routes calls to a different destination. These settings can be:<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| '''Sections/Fields'''<br />
| <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Unconditional'''<br />
| Always route calls to a specific destination.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Busy'''<br />
| Route calls to a specific destination when the extension is in use or do not disturb is enabled.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''No Answer'''<br />
| Route calls to a specific destination when a call is not answered in the defined Ring Time<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Unavailable'''<br />
| Route calls to a specific destination when a phone is turned off, is not registered with the system, or has reached its call limit (as set in the IPitomy IP PBX).<br />
|}<br />
<br />
''Table 18Extension Forward Settings and Descriptions''<br />
<br />
==== Enable/Disable Forward Settings ====<br />
<br />
The following outlines steps to enable or disable forward settings:<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Pick the setting to be modifiedUnconditional, Busy, No Answer or Unavailable.<br />
#Select '''Enabled''' or '''Disabled'''. Disabled turns the forward setting off. Enabled turns the forward setting on.<br />
#Select either Phone Number or Destination. Phone Number allows you to enter the digits you want dialed, like a PSTN number. Destination will bring up the standard dropdown list of destinations in the system; Extensions, Groups, etc.<br />
#Enter the Phone Number or select the Destination you would like the PBX to route to when meeting the forwarding requirements.<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes. The system returns you to the '''Edit Extensions''' page.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Change Unconditional Forwarding via Keypad ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
Only unconditional forwarding can be changed from a touch-tone keypad. Enter the following code to set the unconditional forwarding setting.<br />
<br />
#Dial '''<nowiki>*90</nowiki>''' to '''disable''' forwarding.<br />
#Dial '''<nowiki>*91</nowiki>''' to '''enable''' forwarding.<br />
#Dial '''<nowiki>*92</nowiki>''' to '''set''' the forwarding number.<br />
<br />
==== Change Unconditional Forwarding via PC ====<br />
<br />
The following outlines the steps for the end user to change the extension forwarding setting from a PC using the Smart Personal Console. The administrator will need to have enabled Allow User to control Forwarding under the extensions calling permissions.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Browse the internet to the '''Smart Personal Console''' page.<br />
#Login.<br />
#Click the '''My Account''' link to access the forwarding page.<br />
#Enable/Disable the desired forwarding setting.<br />
#Select either Phone Number or Destination. Phone Number allows you to enter the digits you want dialed, like a PSTN number. Destination will bring up the standard dropdown list of destinations in the system; Extensions, Groups, etc.<br />
#Enter the Phone Number or select the Destination you would like the PBX to route to when meeting the forwarding requirements.<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes<br />
<br />
==== Change Forwarding Number While Away from an Extension ====<br />
<br />
Only unconditional forwarding can be changed from a touch-tone keypad.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Call into the '''Automated Attendant''' (menu).<br />
#Select the touch-tone digit that routes to the Forwarding Gateway.<br />
#The system will prompt for an '''Extension Number''' and '''Password'''.<br />
#The system will indicate if extension forwarding is '''Enabled''' or '''Disabled'''.<br />
#Pressing “'''1'''” toggles between Enabled and Disabled.<br />
#Pressing “'''2'''” allows the forwarding destination to be modified.<br />
<br />
=== Extensions - Advanced Settings ===<br />
<br />
==== Extensions - Network Settings Section ====<br />
<br />
Network settings automatically register in the extension through the system. These settings represent registration and identification information. The system (extension) defaults should not be changed without advanced knowledge of the behaviors of the particular settings.<br />
<br />
[[file:extensionsadvsettings.png|center]]<br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| '''Sections/Fields'''<br />
| colspan="2" | <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| '''SIP Password'''<br />
| colspan="2" | Password for the user to access IP PBX web-based administration system. Use a combination of uppercase letters, lowercase letters, and numbers.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Generate'''<br />
| colspan="2" | If clicked, the system will automatically generate a password for the extension.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Password Strength'''<br />
| colspan="2" | This color code bar indicates the strength of the password being assigned for the extension. The strengths are represented with the following colors:<br />
<br />
[[File:pwrodstrength.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Location'''<br />
| colspan="2" | This allows the user to tell the PBX whether to expect this extension to register as a local extension (LAN) or as a remote extension (WAN).<br />
|-<br />
| '''NAT'''<br />
| colspan="2" | <br />
{|<br />
|-<br />
| <br />
| IMPORTANT: This setting should be ENABLED (checked) unless otherwise instructed. Please contact an IPitomy’s Technical Support Group for assistance or more information.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''HOST'''<br />
| colspan="2" | <br />
{|<br />
|-<br />
| <br />
| IMPORTANT: This should be set to DYNAMIC unless otherwise instructed. Please contact IPitomy’s Technical Support Group for assistance.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Phone Type'''<br />
| colspan="2" | The phone type is a drop down list for selecting which IP phone hardware is being used on the extension. IPitomy supports Aastra phones as well as our own IP550 and IP120 phones, and will be adding additional phone types in the future. When the phone type is selected, another configuration option is available to program the button mapping of each telephone model. The IPitomy IP PBX supports a variety of pre-programmed buttons like BLF, park, voicemail, as well as custom configurable speed dial buttons. Each phone can be configured for its own unique set of buttons.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Phone MAC'''<br />
| colspan="2" | All of the IP phones have a MAC Address. The MAC ID identifies the piece of equipment for configuration. The auto configuration features of IPitomy rely on the MAC address to load the proper configuration files into the telephone when changes are made in the Web-based interface. The configuration files are stored on the IPitomy IP PBX and used when the phone powers back on after a power down cycle. If the configuration files have been updated when the phone powers back on, a new configuration is loaded into the phone. When the new configuration file is loaded, manual settings on the phone take priority and will be kept intact during the upgrade. Note that at this time only Aastra phones require and utilize the MAC address in the phone settings.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Qualify'''<br />
| colspan="2" | This is the interval of time between checking registration for the phone. Default is set to 8000 and should not be changed unless instructed by an IPitomy representative.<br />
|-<br />
| '''DTMF Mode'''<br />
| colspan="2" | This is where you set what kind of DTMF signaling the extension will use. The dropdown lists options are:<br />
*'''rfc2833''' (recommended in the HD Phone models)<br />
*'''auto'''<br />
*'''info''' (recommended in the IPitomy legacy phone models IP120 & IP550)<br />
*'''inband'''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''User Type'''<br />
| colspan="2" | This is defaulted to Friend and should not be changed unless instructed to do so by an IPitomy representative.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Call Limit'''<br />
| This is the number of concurrent calls allowable at an extension. The Call Limit selected must be between 1 and 99. Default is set to 4. It needs to be above 0 for BLF keys to function.<br />
| <br />
|-<br />
| '''Can Reinvite'''<br />
| colspan="2" | This parameter allows a device to reconnect calls midstream.<br />
*YES = if the phone type allows the re-invite feature<br />
*NO = if the phone type does not allow the re-invite feature<br />
*N/A = accepts the system wide default defined in the System Setup section of the Administration System. If the default setting is acceptable and works within your business, we recommend leaving the parameter set to N/A.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
|'''RTP Keep-alive'''<br />
|update text<br />
|-<br />
|'''Send Remote Party ID'''<br />
|update text<br />
|-<br />
|'''Trust Remote Party ID'''<br />
|update text<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Insecure'''<br />
| colspan="2" | This parameter allows you to specify how to handle connections with peers. Explanation of the different options available on the drop-down list are:<br />
*'''PORT''' = Ignore the port number where authentication came from.<br />
*'''INVITE''' = Do not require the initial invite to authenticate.<br />
*'''PORT+INVITE''' = Do not require initial invite to authenticate and ignore the port where the request came from.<br />
*'''YES''': To match a peer based by IP Address only and not the port.<br />
*'''VERY''': To allow registered hosts to call without re-authenticating. This is the default setting.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Music On Hold'''<br />
| colspan="2" | This setting allows the user to select a different Music On Hold playlist for their extension then the system default playlist.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
''Table 19Extensions Advanced Networking Settings and Descriptions''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
===== Edit Extensions - Network Settings =====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Edit Extensions''' page, locate the extension that you want to update. Click the [[File:penciledit.png]] (edit extensions) icon to the right of the name. <p> You can also '''edit multiple''' extensions by selecting (placing a checkmark) in the boxes to the left of the extensions you want to update. Click the Edit PBX Settings button located at the top right hand corner of the list.You will see the extensions that are currently being updated. Make sure that the “'''Only save the changed field'''s” box is selected.</p><br />
#The '''Extension Details''' page appears. Select the link '''Advanced''' to open the '''Advanced Settings''' page.<br />
#Make the necessary changes in the '''Network Settings''' section of the page.<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes. The system returns you to the '''Edit Extensions''' page.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Extensions - Voicemail Settings Section ====<br />
<br />
These settings manage voicemail messaging and routing. Mailboxes created when the extension is built can either be edited on the Advanded section of the extension or on the Voicemail section under Destinations.<br />
[[File:extensionsvmail.png|center]]<br />
<br/>This table describes the voicemail setting options for each extension.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0"<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Sections/Fields'''<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Mailbox'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | This is the number associated with the extension.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Attach to Email'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Select to enclose the message received in a notification e-mail as an attachment to the email address entered for the extension. An audio file (.Wav) will be the attachment. This requires for Unified Messaging to be configured on the PBX.<br />
'''YES''' = attach message to email.<br />
<br />
'''NO''' =do not attach message to email.<br />
<br />
'''N/A''' = accepts the system wide default defined under PBX Setup=>Voicemail. If the default setting is acceptable and works within your business, we recommend leaving the parameter set to N/A.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Delete After Emailing'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Delete the voicemail after it has been emailed to the email address provided for the extension in General Settings.<br />
'''YES''' = delete message after emailing.<br />
<br />
'''NO''' = do not delete message after emailing.<br />
<br />
'''N/A''' = accepts the system wide default defined under PBX Setup=>Voicemail. If the default setting is acceptable and works within your business, we recommend leaving the parameter set to N/A.<br />
<br />
'''Note: This option should not be enabled with turn old after emailing. If you enable both, the message will not be emailed but it will be deleted.'''<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Turn Old After Emailing'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | After emailing, the system moves the voicemail message to the Old folder.<br />
'''YES''' = will move message to Old messages folder after emailing.<br />
<br />
'''NO''' = messages will not be moved after emailing.<br />
<br />
'''Note: This option should not be enabled with delete after emailing. If you enable both, the message will not be emailed but it will be deleted.'''<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Say Caller ID'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | State Caller ID prior to playback of the message.<br />
'''YES''' = play caller id prior to message content.<br />
<br />
'''NO''' = do not play caller id prior to message content.<br />
<br />
'''N/A''' = accepts the system wide default defined under PBX Setup=>Voicemail. If the default setting is acceptable and works within your business, we recommend leaving the parameter set to N/A.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow Review'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Allow callers to review a message after they have recorded it.<br />
'''YES''' = give callers leaving messages the option to review and rerecord the message they are leaving.<br />
<br />
'''NO''' = do not give callers the option to rerecord.<br />
<br />
'''N/A''' = accepts the system wide default defined under PBX Setup=>Voicemail. If the default setting is acceptable and works within your business, we recommend leaving the parameter set to N/A.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow Operator'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Allow pressing “0” during the voicemail greeting to reach the system-wide operator.<br />
'''YES''' = allow dialing 0 from mailbox.<br />
<br />
'''NO''' = disallow dialing 0 from mailbox.<br />
<br />
'''N/A''' = accepts the system wide default defined under PBX Setup=>Voicemail. If the default setting is acceptable and works within your business, we recommend leaving the parameter set to N/A.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Play Envelope Message'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Play the time of call prior to the message.<br />
'''YES''' = enabled.<br />
<br />
'''NO''' = disabled.<br />
<br />
'''N/A''' = accepts the system wide default defined under PBX Setup=>Voicemail. If the default setting is acceptable and works within your business, we recommend leaving the parameter set to N/A.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Auto Delete Voicemail In'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Define the number of days in which voicemail messages are to be automatically deleted from a mailbox. If this is set to “'''0'''” (zero) the voicemail message will never expire.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow Dial Out Access'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | This allows the ‘Dial Out’ feature when a user is listening to their voicemail.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow Mobile Web Access'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | update text<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Exclude from Directory'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | This indicates whether to exclude this extension from the directory.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Mailbox Operator'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If a caller presses “'''0'''” (zero) while listening to your mailbox greeting, the caller will be routed to this destination. Also, this is where a user will be sent if he dials ”0” from this extension. '''Set this to None to use the system default''' '''which is set under PBX SetupGeneral.'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Mailbox Exit Destination'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | The Mailbox Exit Destination is where the system will route a caller who presses '''<nowiki>#</nowiki>''' when they finish leaving a voicemail message. '''Setting this to None will use the system default, which is set under PBX SetupGeneral.'''<br />
|}<br />
<br />
===== Edit Voicemail Settings =====<br />
<br />
The following outlines the steps to set voicemail parameters.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Edit Extensions''' page, locate the extension that you want to update. Click the [[File:penciledit.png]] (edit extensions) icon to the right of the name. <p>You can also '''edit multiple''' extensions by selecting (placing a checkmark) in the boxes to the left of the extensions you want to update. Click the Edit PBX Settings button located at the top right hand corner of the list.You will see the extensions that are currently being updated. Make sure that the “'''Only save the changed field'''s” box is selected.</p><br />
#The '''Extension Detail '''page appears. Select the link to open the '''Advanced Settings''' page.<br />
#Make the necessary changes in the '''Voicemail Settings''' section of the page.<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes. The system returns you to the '''Edit Extensions''' page.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Extensions - Allow CODECs Section ====<br />
<br />
These transmission speeds are configured by the service provider and designed to automatically register in the extension through the system.<br />
[[File:codecssettings.png|center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0"<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Sections/Fields'''<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''CODEC Permissions (Allow CODECs)'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Allows the administrator to define which codec the extension should use, and specify a priority from top down.<br />
<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0"<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000; border-left:0.0069in solid #000000; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''IMPORTANT: Please contact IPitomy’s Technical Support Group for assistance if you feel you need to change these settings.'''<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|}<br />
<br />
===== Edit CODEC Settings =====<br />
<br />
The following outlines the steps to set CODECs parameters.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Edit Extensions''' page, locate the extension that you want to update. Click the [[File:penciledit.png]] (edit extensions) icon to the right of the name. <p>You can also '''edit multiple''' extensions by selecting (placing a checkmark) in the boxes to the left of the extensions you want to update. Click the Edit PBX Settings button located at the top right hand corner of the list.You will see the extensions that are currently being updated. Make sure that the “'''Only save the changed field'''s” box is selected.</p><br />
#The '''Extension Detail''' page appears. Select the '''Advanced''' link to open the '''Advanced Settings''' page.<br />
#Make the necessary changes in the '''Allow CODECs Settings''' section of the page. Clicking Up or Down when highlighting a codec will allow you to raise or lower its usage priority.<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes. The system returns you to the '''Edit Extensions''' page.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Extensions Calling Permissions Section ====<br />
<br />
Calling permissions define the types of calls that can be sent and received from an extension and the call actions this extension can take. For example, you may want to limit who has the ability to monitor another extension.<br />
[[File:callingpermissions.png|center]]<br />
<br/>The following table describes the settings for an extension’s calling permissions.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0"<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Sections/Fields'''<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow User to Control Forwarding'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), this allows the user to modify their forwarding and schedule settings when they log into the Smart Personal Console user interface.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow User to Control Follow-Me'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), this allows the user to modify their Follow-Me settings when they log into the Smart Personal Console user interface.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow User to Control Phone Key Settings'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), this allows the user to modify their Phone Key settings when they log into the Smart Personal Console user interface.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Internal Calls'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), this permits calls made from internal extensions.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow Incoming Intercom Paging'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), this permits a page to be heard through this extension.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow Outgoing Intercom Paging'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), this permits a page to be made through this extension.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow User to Forward Calls'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), this permits an extension to forward a call or voicemail message to another destination on the system.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow User to Record Calls'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), this permits the extension to record phone conversations.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow user to Listen to Others’ Calls'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), this allows the user to listen to other user’s phone conversations.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow User to Whisper'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), this allows the user to whisper to another user during a phone conversation. Whisper is similar to Listen but you can coach and only the person at the extension can hear.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow Others to Whisper'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), other extensions can Whisper to your extensions calls<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow Others to Listen'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), other extensions can Listen to your extensions calls<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow Others to Record this User’s Calls'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), other extensions can Record calls at your extension<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow Call Park'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), this permits extension to park a call.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Is Operator'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), the extension is designated as an operator. Being an operator allows the extension to control Day/Night mode overrides.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
===== Add/Edit Calling Permissions =====<br />
<br />
The following outlines the steps to set calling permissions for extensions.'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Edit Extensions''' page, locate the extension that you want to update. Click the [[File:penciledit.png]] (edit extensions) icon to the right of the name. <p>You can also '''edit multiple''' extensions by selecting (placing a checkmark) in the boxes to the left of the extensions you want to update. Click the Edit PBX Settings button located at the top right hand corner of the list.You will see the extensions that are currently being updated. Make sure that the “'''Only save the changed field'''s” box is selected.</p><br />
#The '''Extension Detail''' page appears. Select the '''Advanced''' link to open the '''Advanced Settings''' page.<br />
#Make the necessary changes in the '''Calling Permissions''' section of the page.<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]]button to save the changes. The system returns you to the '''Edit Extensions''' page.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Extensions - Follow-Me Section ====<br />
<br />
The Follow Me feature allows the PBX to try and find a user by calling pre-configured numbers, simultaneously or in sequence of priority. Once answered, the called party is given the option to accept or reject the call. If the call is rejected, or not answered at all, the call will return to the PBX allowing the caller to leave a Voice Mail message.<br />
[[File:followmesetup.png|center]]<br />
<br/>From this window it is easy to configure numbers to be dialed by the system in order to find the user. You can adjust the Name, Number (Number to be dialed), Type of Device that is being called, Rings to wait for an answer, and you can weight the priority from 1-20 (20 being lowest 1 being highest) to define search order.<br />
<br />
The Use radio box allows you to easily turn on and off numbers to be dialed. Since the SPC can be accessed via remote management, this allows the users to modify and create these lists from remote locations easily. The following table details the parameters and descriptions necessary to configure the Follow-Me feature.<br />
<br />
The system also allows you to record your own Prompts (recordings) under '''PBX''' '''Setup'''=>'''Prompts''', and then use those prompts as custom messages for FollowMe feature.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| '''Sections/Fields'''<br />
| <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| '''Play the Incoming Message to Caller before Starting Search'''<br/><br />
| When Enabled (checked), the system plays the Status Prompt to the caller.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Record the Caller’s Name and Play it to You'''<br />
| When Enabled (checked), the caller will be asked to record their name, and will announce that recorded name prior to prompting the called party to accept or reject the call.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Play the Unreachable Message if You Could Not Be Found'''<br />
| When Enabled (checked), this will play the Sorry Prompt if the call is not answered, otherwise it goes right to the voicemail greeting.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Number of Seconds to Total Search Time so Caller Has Time to Listen & Record'''<br />
| This allows you to configure how many seconds the system will spend searching for the called party. Default is 12 seconds.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Call From Prompt'''<br />
| This plays when Record the Caller’s Name and Play it to You is enabled (checked). The system default message is “Incoming Call From” followed by the recording the caller made of their name.<br />
|-<br />
| '''No Recording Prompt'''<br />
| This plays when Record the Caller’s Name and Play it to You is disabled (not checked). The system default message of “You have an incoming call” followed by the Options Prompt.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Options Prompt'''<br />
| This plays after you have answered the call and prompts you to press either “1” to accept the call or “2” to reject the call. The system default message can be changed, but the options remain the same.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Please Hold Prompt'''<br />
| This plays to the caller alerting them that the system is going to find the user they are trying to reach. The system default message of “Please hold while I try to locate the person you are calling” will play during the search process.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Status Prompt'''<br />
| This plays the system default message of “The person you are calling is not at their desk, I will try to locate them for you”.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Sorry Prompt'''<br />
| This plays if the person could not be reached or they reject the call. The system default message of “I’m sorry, but I was unable to locate the person you were calling”.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Music On Hold'''<br />
| This allows you to specify a particular Music On Hold playlist to play to the caller during the search process. The system default Music on Hold (set at PBX Setup->Music on Hold) will play when this parameter is set to system default.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Numbers'''<br />
| If selected (checked), the Follow Me feature will try to either simultaneously or in sequence of priority to try and locate you by using this call list.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
==== Add/Edit Follow Me Settings ====<br />
<br />
The following outlines the steps to set calling permissions for extensions.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Edit Extensions''' page, locate the extension that you want to update. Click the [[File:penciledit.png]] (edit extensions) icon to the right of the name.<br />
#The '''Extension Detail''' page appears. Select the '''Advanced''' link to open the '''Advanced Settings''' page.<br />
#Click on the '''Numbers and Settings''' button under the '''Follow-Me''' section of the '''Advanced''' page.<br />
#The '''Administrator View Follow-Me Settings/Extensions''' window appears.<br />
#Make the necessary changes in the '''Follow-Me''' parameters. Click on the '''SAVE''' button to save the changes to the Follow-Me settings. A message confirming the changes will appear.<br />
#Click the '''EXIT''' button to close the window.<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes. The system returns you to the '''Edit Extensions''' page.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the right hand corner of the top of the page, to commit the changes to the database.</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Extensionsvmail.png&diff=2131
File:Extensionsvmail.png
2013-05-29T15:28:29Z
<p>Nichole: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{RMImage<br />
|Filename=File:Extensionsvmail.png<br />
|CopyrightBy=<br />
|CreationDate=2013/05/29<br />
|Uploader=Nichole<br />
|UploadDate=2013/05/29<br />
|Description=<br />
|Keywords=<br />
|Format=image/png<br />
|RelatedArticles=User:Nichole<br />
}}</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Extensionsvmail.png&diff=2130
File:Extensionsvmail.png
2013-05-29T15:28:29Z
<p>Nichole: uploaded a new version of &quot;File:Extensionsvmail.png&quot;: updated</p>
<hr />
<div></div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=IPPBX_Manual_System_Admin_Adding_and_Deleting_Extensions&diff=2129
IPPBX Manual System Admin Adding and Deleting Extensions
2013-05-29T15:26:58Z
<p>Nichole: /* Extensions - Network Settings Section */</p>
<hr />
<div>'''Extensions'''<br />
<br />
Extensions define where specific people or departments can be reached in an organization. They should be setup first in the system. The following is a list of the various settings/parameters that will can be updated for each extension. The parameters you configure for the extensions will vary based on the customer’s general business practices.<br />
<br />
*General Settings<br />
*Forwarding Settings<br />
*Advanced Network Settings<br />
*Advanced Voicemail Settings<br />
*Advanced Allow Codecs Settings<br />
*Advanced Calling Permissions<br />
*Advanced Follow-Me<br />
<br />
<br />
=== '''Add/Import Tab'''<br/> ===<br />
<br />
The '''Add/Import '''tab allows you to create new extensions or edit existing extensions.<br />
<br />
<br/>Use the Setup Worksheet to upload the CSV file and automatically create the Extension information. Please refer to the Setup Worksheet section of this guide for details.<br />
<br />
[[File:addimporttab.png|center]]<br />
[[File:createextension.png|center]]<br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| '''Sections/Fields'''<br />
| <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| '''Extension Name'''<br />
| This is the name of the person that the extension will be assigned to (using this device).<br />
|-<br />
| '''Email Address'''<br />
| This is the user’s email address (optional)<br />
|-<br />
| '''Ext. #'''<br />
| The extension number that is assigned to this device.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Device Type'''<br />
| This is the type of device that will be using this extension (i.e. IP550).<br />
|-<br />
| '''MAC'''<br />
| This is the MAC ID of the device (optional).<br />
|-<br />
| '''AutoNumber/Start At'''<br />
| Selecting this option allows you to automatically number the extensions that you need to add. To use this feature, simply enter the extension number you want to start with then select (place a checkmark) the AutoNumber option.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
''Table 15Create Extension Fields and Descriptions''<br />
<br />
==== Add/Create Extensions<br/> ====<br />
<br />
This section describes in detail how to create a new extension.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From any page of the PBX Admin system, click on the button next to the '''Destinations''' link to expand the menu. The '''Destination''' menu opens and displays the options available.<br />
#Click on the '''Extensions''' link. The Extensions page opens and displays a listing of extensions (if ones already exists).<br />
#Click on the box to the left of the '''Extensions '''field. This value defaults to “'''10'''”. Enter the number of extensions you want to add and then click the '''ADD''' button.<br />
#The '''Create Extensions''' page appears displaying the number of rows that was specified. Enter information for the extension in these fields. See table above for details.<br />
#:You can have the system automatically number the extensions you want to create by clicking the '''AutoNumber''' checkbox located on the top left hand corner of the '''Create Extensions''' page.<br />
#Click on the '''CREATE''' button when all the extension information you want to create is entered. The system responds with a message indicating the results of adding the new extension(s). You should see a “'''SUCCESS'''” message.<br />
#If there is an error, you will see an “'''ERROR'''” indicated under the Results field. An error is typically due to an extension number that is being duplicated (already existing in the system). Make the necessary adjustments to correct the error then click the '''CREATE''' button.<br />
#Click on the [[File:savechanges.png]] button, to save the changes.<br />
#Select the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
=== '''Search Tab'''<br/> ===<br />
<br />
This tab allows the user to search the extensions for keywords in the fields: Class of Service, Departments, Name, Numbers, CID Names, CID Numbers, Email, or Status .This section describes in detail how to search for existing extensions.<br />
[[File:searchextensions.png|center]]<br />
<br/>The following table describes the types of search parameters the system will perform.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| '''Sections/Fields'''<br />
| <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| '''Class of Service'''<br />
| This is the class of service that is assigned to the extension(s).<br />
|-<br />
| '''Departments'''<br />
| This is the department that is assigned to the extension(s).<br />
|-<br />
| '''Names'''<br />
| This is the name of the user assigned to the extension(s).<br />
|-<br />
| '''Numbers'''<br />
| This is the extension number.<br />
|-<br />
| '''CID Names'''<br />
| The caller ID name that is associated with the extension(s).<br />
|-<br />
| '''CID Numbers'''<br />
| This is the caller ID number that is associated with the extension(s).<br />
|-<br />
| '''Emails'''<br />
| Email address that is associated with the extension(s).<br />
|-<br />
| '''Status'''<br />
| This is the status of the extension(s).<br />
|-<br />
| '''Match Search Filter'''<br />
| Exactindicates that you want the search to match exactly as the search criteria that is entered.<br />
Partialindicates that you want to partially match the search criteria entered.<br />
<br />
|}<br />
<br />
==== Search Extension<br/> ====<br />
<br />
This section describes how to search for extensions.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Extensions''' page, click the '''Search Tab'''. The list of extensions that are in the system appears with search options at the top section of the page.<br />
#Click the [[File:dropdownlist.png]] drop-down arrow icon next to the '''Class of Service''' list.<br />
<br />
Select the desired '''search criteria''' then enter the parameters in the box to the right of the list then click the '''Search''' button. If the system finds any extensions matching your search parameter, it will display the information in the extensions window.<br />
<br />
If the field is left blank, the system will bring all the extensions.<br />
<br />
=== View Tab (Extensions)<br/> ===<br />
<br />
This tab allows the user to sort the display of extensions by Phone Model. Once sorted, phone key settings can be mass edited for phones of the same model. This section describes in detail how to view existing extensions.<br />
<br />
[[File:extensionsviewpage.png|center]]<br />
<br />
==== Edit or View Extension<br/> ====<br />
<br />
This section describes in detail how to view or edit extension details.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Navigate to the '''Destinations'''=>'''Extensions''' page.<br />
#Select the [[File:penciledit.png]] or the [[File:pencilextensionedit.png]] icon to the right of the extension name you want to view or edit. The pencil edits the PBX settings and the pencil with the handset behind it edits the Phone settings.<br />
#The '''Edit Extensions''' page displays with setting details for the extension.<br />
#Make the necessary changes to the extension.<br />
#Click on the [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the right hand corner of the top of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
You can edit multiple extensions by selecting (placing a checkmark in the box next to extension name). Only the fields being changed (that is common for all extensions selected) will be modifiedi.e. Status or call group, etc.).<br />
<br />
Another shortcut that the system provides you is the '''Previous''' and '''Next''' button located on the top left corner of the '''Edit Extension''' page. Use these buttons to navigate backward or forward to find the extensions you want to view or modify.<br />
<br />
==== Mass Edit PBX Extension Settings<br/> ====<br />
<br />
This section describes in detail how to view or edit extension details.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Destinations'''=>'''Extensions''' page, click on the '''View''' tab. A list of extensions appears.<br />
<br />
You can sort the list by phone model by selecting (placing a checkmark) the'''Phone Model & Settings''' option located in the top left hand corner of the screen. If you are using this method, you can also Mass Edit Phone Key settings. See the section below for steps.<br />
<br />
#Select (place a checkmark) in the box next to the extension name(s) you want to view or edit.<br />
#Click on the '''Edit PBX Settings''' button. The extension details page appears. On the top left corner of the screen, you will see the extension numbers that you are viewing or editing.<br />
#Make the necessary changes to the extension settings then click on the [[File:Savechanges.png]] button to save the changes.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the right hand corner of the top of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Mass Edit Phone Key Settings<br/> ====<br />
<br />
This section of the Administration Guide describes how to mass edit the key settings for extensions using the same phone model.<br />
[[File:masseditfeature.png|center]]<br />
<br/>'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Destinations'''->'''Extensions''' page, click on the '''View '''tab.<br />
#Select the '''Phone Models and Settings''' option at the top left hand corner of the list.<br />
#The system will display a list of the extensions in a grouping of phone types. Select the group of phones you want to edit. A listing of all the extensions in the phone group will appear.<br />
#Select the box next to the name of the extensions you want to update or click on box next to the '''Name''' field at the top of the column to select all the extensions.<br />
#Click the '''Edit Phone Settings''' button. The system will take you to the '''Key Settings''' page for the phones. At the top of the page you will see a list of all the extensions that you are updating.<br />
#By default, the '''Only Save Changed Fields''' option Is selected, de-select if needed.<br />
#Once all the changes are made, select the '''Save and Restart''' '''Phone''' button to save changes and reboot the phones so they can pull down their updated configuration file.<br />
<br />
==== Delete Extension<br/> ====<br />
<br />
This section describes in detail how to delete existing extensions.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Navigate to the '''Destinations'''->'''Extensions''' page<br />
#Select the [[File:deleteselected.png]] icon to the right of the extension name you want to Delete<br />
#The extension is deleted and a confirmation message will appear. Click '''OK''' on the message window.<br />
#The system returns you to the '''Extensions''' page. The extension that was just deleted will no longer appear on the list of extensions.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Delete Multiple Extension<br/> ====<br />
<br />
This section describes in detail how to delete multiple extensions.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Navigate to the '''Destinations'''=>'''Extensions''' page<br />
#Select (place a checkmark) in the boxes next to the extension name(s) you want to delete.<br />
#Click on the Delete All button. The selected extension will be removed from the list and deleted from the database.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
=== Extensions - General Settings Section<br/> ===<br />
<br />
Once the extensions have been added to the database, you can edit the settings for each of the extensions.<br />
<br />
[[File:extensionsgeneralsettings.png|center]]<br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| '''Sections/Fields'''<br />
| <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Name'''<br />
| Name of the user associated with the extensions being created<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Number'''<br />
| Extension number for this person or department. This must be 3 to 4 digits in length<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Email'''<br />
| Email address for the person assigned to the extension. This will allow the system to forward email messages to the address of the person at the extension when properly configured.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Status'''<br />
| Active = currently in use<br />
Disabled = currently not in use<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Class of Service'''<br />
| This is the service type for the extension. When initially created, the PBX will set this to the COS you have definined as the system default class of service on the PBX SetupGeneral Page<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''PIN'''<br />
| This is the number used to access the extensions voicemail and can be between 1 and 6 digits long. The default setting is for the PIN to be the extension number. Be sure to instruct users to change the PIN to avoid unauthorized use.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Ring Time'''<br />
| This is the time in seconds that a call will ring before it is considered unanswered. Ring time must be between 1 and 100 seconds in length.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Call Group'''<br />
| This number assigns this extension to a group with a similar purpose (e.g., Sales or Customer Service). Multiple call groups can be assigned to each extension by putting a comma between the group numbers. The call groups also define which Pickup Groups can answer calls to this extension.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Pickup Group'''<br />
| This number should match any Call Group number entered on an extension. It defines the Call Group Numbers this extension can pickup remotely by pressing 99.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Apply Schedule'''<br />
| When an extension is created, a schedule destination is created automatically. This schedule is not activated until the Apply Schedule box is selected. When it is selected, all calls sent directly to this extension must first pass through the extension’s schedule and will be routed accordingly. Extension schedules will appear with the name of the extension (e.g., Extension 123 would appear as “ext_123”). (See the Schedules section of this guide for more information.)<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''CID Override'''<br />
| If enabled, the user will be able to override the Caller ID settings. When the user places a call, the original assigned CID will be bypassed and the name and number will that is entered in the CID Name and Number fields will be sent instead. Always check with your provider that CID override is allowed before configuring.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''CID Name'''<br />
| If the CID Override parameter is enabled, this is the Caller ID name that will be seen by the recipient when an outbound call is placed. Always check with your provider that CID override is allowed before configuring.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''CID Number'''<br />
| If the CID Override parameter is enabled, this is the Caller ID number that will be seen by the recipient when an outbound call is placed. Always check with your provider that CID override is allowed before configuring.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Detect Fax'''<br />
| If checked, calls from an Analog or T1/PRI card that route direct to this extension will spend a period of time (Defined under PBX SetupGeneral) checking if the call is a fax. During this time, the PBX holds the call; if fax tone is detected, the call will be passed along to the destination defined for Route Fax To, otherwise it will pass the call to the extension after the detection time has expired.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Route Fax To'''<br />
| Define where calls will be routed if fax tone is detected.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
''Table 17General Extension Settings and Descriptions''<br />
<br />
=== Extensions - Forward Settings Section<br/> ===<br />
<br />
The extensions forwarding settings are made to be very user friendly. The settings may be modified from the Smart Personal Console, changed from your telephone extension, or changed remotely from any telephone (including cell phones), using the touch-tone key pad.<br />
[[File:extensionsforwardsettings.png|center]]<br />
<br/>Forward settings routes calls to a different destination. These settings can be:<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| '''Sections/Fields'''<br />
| <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Unconditional'''<br />
| Always route calls to a specific destination.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Busy'''<br />
| Route calls to a specific destination when the extension is in use or do not disturb is enabled.<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''No Answer'''<br />
| Route calls to a specific destination when a call is not answered in the defined Ring Time<br />
|-<br />
| style="text-align: center;" | '''Unavailable'''<br />
| Route calls to a specific destination when a phone is turned off, is not registered with the system, or has reached its call limit (as set in the IPitomy IP PBX).<br />
|}<br />
<br />
''Table 18Extension Forward Settings and Descriptions''<br />
<br />
==== Enable/Disable Forward Settings ====<br />
<br />
The following outlines steps to enable or disable forward settings:<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Pick the setting to be modifiedUnconditional, Busy, No Answer or Unavailable.<br />
#Select '''Enabled''' or '''Disabled'''. Disabled turns the forward setting off. Enabled turns the forward setting on.<br />
#Select either Phone Number or Destination. Phone Number allows you to enter the digits you want dialed, like a PSTN number. Destination will bring up the standard dropdown list of destinations in the system; Extensions, Groups, etc.<br />
#Enter the Phone Number or select the Destination you would like the PBX to route to when meeting the forwarding requirements.<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes. The system returns you to the '''Edit Extensions''' page.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Change Unconditional Forwarding via Keypad ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
Only unconditional forwarding can be changed from a touch-tone keypad. Enter the following code to set the unconditional forwarding setting.<br />
<br />
#Dial '''<nowiki>*90</nowiki>''' to '''disable''' forwarding.<br />
#Dial '''<nowiki>*91</nowiki>''' to '''enable''' forwarding.<br />
#Dial '''<nowiki>*92</nowiki>''' to '''set''' the forwarding number.<br />
<br />
==== Change Unconditional Forwarding via PC ====<br />
<br />
The following outlines the steps for the end user to change the extension forwarding setting from a PC using the Smart Personal Console. The administrator will need to have enabled Allow User to control Forwarding under the extensions calling permissions.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Browse the internet to the '''Smart Personal Console''' page.<br />
#Login.<br />
#Click the '''My Account''' link to access the forwarding page.<br />
#Enable/Disable the desired forwarding setting.<br />
#Select either Phone Number or Destination. Phone Number allows you to enter the digits you want dialed, like a PSTN number. Destination will bring up the standard dropdown list of destinations in the system; Extensions, Groups, etc.<br />
#Enter the Phone Number or select the Destination you would like the PBX to route to when meeting the forwarding requirements.<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes<br />
<br />
==== Change Forwarding Number While Away from an Extension ====<br />
<br />
Only unconditional forwarding can be changed from a touch-tone keypad.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Call into the '''Automated Attendant''' (menu).<br />
#Select the touch-tone digit that routes to the Forwarding Gateway.<br />
#The system will prompt for an '''Extension Number''' and '''Password'''.<br />
#The system will indicate if extension forwarding is '''Enabled''' or '''Disabled'''.<br />
#Pressing “'''1'''” toggles between Enabled and Disabled.<br />
#Pressing “'''2'''” allows the forwarding destination to be modified.<br />
<br />
=== Extensions - Advanced Settings ===<br />
<br />
==== Extensions - Network Settings Section ====<br />
<br />
Network settings automatically register in the extension through the system. These settings represent registration and identification information. The system (extension) defaults should not be changed without advanced knowledge of the behaviors of the particular settings.<br />
<br />
[[file:extensionsadvsettings.png|center]]<br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| '''Sections/Fields'''<br />
| colspan="2" | <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| '''SIP Password'''<br />
| colspan="2" | Password for the user to access IP PBX web-based administration system. Use a combination of uppercase letters, lowercase letters, and numbers.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Generate'''<br />
| colspan="2" | If clicked, the system will automatically generate a password for the extension.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Password Strength'''<br />
| colspan="2" | This color code bar indicates the strength of the password being assigned for the extension. The strengths are represented with the following colors:<br />
<br />
[[File:pwrodstrength.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Location'''<br />
| colspan="2" | This allows the user to tell the PBX whether to expect this extension to register as a local extension (LAN) or as a remote extension (WAN).<br />
|-<br />
| '''NAT'''<br />
| colspan="2" | <br />
{|<br />
|-<br />
| <br />
| IMPORTANT: This setting should be ENABLED (checked) unless otherwise instructed. Please contact an IPitomy’s Technical Support Group for assistance or more information.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''HOST'''<br />
| colspan="2" | <br />
{|<br />
|-<br />
| <br />
| IMPORTANT: This should be set to DYNAMIC unless otherwise instructed. Please contact IPitomy’s Technical Support Group for assistance.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Phone Type'''<br />
| colspan="2" | The phone type is a drop down list for selecting which IP phone hardware is being used on the extension. IPitomy supports Aastra phones as well as our own IP550 and IP120 phones, and will be adding additional phone types in the future. When the phone type is selected, another configuration option is available to program the button mapping of each telephone model. The IPitomy IP PBX supports a variety of pre-programmed buttons like BLF, park, voicemail, as well as custom configurable speed dial buttons. Each phone can be configured for its own unique set of buttons.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Phone MAC'''<br />
| colspan="2" | All of the IP phones have a MAC Address. The MAC ID identifies the piece of equipment for configuration. The auto configuration features of IPitomy rely on the MAC address to load the proper configuration files into the telephone when changes are made in the Web-based interface. The configuration files are stored on the IPitomy IP PBX and used when the phone powers back on after a power down cycle. If the configuration files have been updated when the phone powers back on, a new configuration is loaded into the phone. When the new configuration file is loaded, manual settings on the phone take priority and will be kept intact during the upgrade. Note that at this time only Aastra phones require and utilize the MAC address in the phone settings.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Qualify'''<br />
| colspan="2" | This is the interval of time between checking registration for the phone. Default is set to 8000 and should not be changed unless instructed by an IPitomy representative.<br />
|-<br />
| '''DTMF Mode'''<br />
| colspan="2" | This is where you set what kind of DTMF signaling the extension will use. The dropdown lists options are:<br />
*'''rfc2833''' (recommended in the HD Phone models)<br />
*'''auto'''<br />
*'''info''' (recommended in the IPitomy legacy phone models IP120 & IP550)<br />
*'''inband'''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''User Type'''<br />
| colspan="2" | This is defaulted to Friend and should not be changed unless instructed to do so by an IPitomy representative.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Call Limit'''<br />
| This is the number of concurrent calls allowable at an extension. The Call Limit selected must be between 1 and 99. Default is set to 4. It needs to be above 0 for BLF keys to function.<br />
| <br />
|-<br />
| '''Can Reinvite'''<br />
| colspan="2" | This parameter allows a device to reconnect calls midstream.<br />
*YES = if the phone type allows the re-invite feature<br />
*NO = if the phone type does not allow the re-invite feature<br />
*N/A = accepts the system wide default defined in the System Setup section of the Administration System. If the default setting is acceptable and works within your business, we recommend leaving the parameter set to N/A.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
|'''RTP Keep-alive'''<br />
|update text<br />
|-<br />
|'''Send Remote Party ID'''<br />
|update text<br />
|-<br />
|'''Trust Remote Party ID'''<br />
|update text<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Insecure'''<br />
| colspan="2" | This parameter allows you to specify how to handle connections with peers. Explanation of the different options available on the drop-down list are:<br />
*'''PORT''' = Ignore the port number where authentication came from.<br />
*'''INVITE''' = Do not require the initial invite to authenticate.<br />
*'''PORT+INVITE''' = Do not require initial invite to authenticate and ignore the port where the request came from.<br />
*'''YES''': To match a peer based by IP Address only and not the port.<br />
*'''VERY''': To allow registered hosts to call without re-authenticating. This is the default setting.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Music On Hold'''<br />
| colspan="2" | This setting allows the user to select a different Music On Hold playlist for their extension then the system default playlist.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
''Table 19Extensions Advanced Networking Settings and Descriptions''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
===== Edit Extensions - Network Settings =====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Edit Extensions''' page, locate the extension that you want to update. Click the [[File:penciledit.png]] (edit extensions) icon to the right of the name. <p> You can also '''edit multiple''' extensions by selecting (placing a checkmark) in the boxes to the left of the extensions you want to update. Click the Edit PBX Settings button located at the top right hand corner of the list.You will see the extensions that are currently being updated. Make sure that the “'''Only save the changed field'''s” box is selected.</p><br />
#The '''Extension Details''' page appears. Select the link '''Advanced''' to open the '''Advanced Settings''' page.<br />
#Make the necessary changes in the '''Network Settings''' section of the page.<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes. The system returns you to the '''Edit Extensions''' page.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Extensions - Voicemail Settings Section ====<br />
<br />
These settings manage voicemail messaging and routing. Mailboxes created when the extension is built can either be edited on the Advanded section of the extension or on the Voicemail section under Destinations.<br />
[[File:extensionsvmail.png|center]]<br />
<br/>This table describes the voicemail setting options for each extension.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0"<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Sections/Fields'''<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Mailbox'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | This is the number associated with the extension.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Attach to Email'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Select to enclose the message received in a notification e-mail as an attachment to the email address entered for the extension. An audio file (.Wav) will be the attachment. This requires for Unified Messaging to be configured on the PBX.<br />
'''YES''' = attach message to email.<br />
<br />
'''NO''' =do not attach message to email.<br />
<br />
'''N/A''' = accepts the system wide default defined under PBX Setup=>Voicemail. If the default setting is acceptable and works within your business, we recommend leaving the parameter set to N/A.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Delete After Emailing'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Delete the voicemail after it has been emailed to the email address provided for the extension in General Settings.<br />
'''YES''' = delete message after emailing.<br />
<br />
'''NO''' = do not delete message after emailing.<br />
<br />
'''N/A''' = accepts the system wide default defined under PBX Setup=>Voicemail. If the default setting is acceptable and works within your business, we recommend leaving the parameter set to N/A.<br />
<br />
'''Note: This option should not be enabled with turn old after emailing. If you enable both, the message will not be emailed but it will be deleted.'''<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Turn Old After Emailing'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | After emailing, the system moves the voicemail message to the Old folder.<br />
'''YES''' = will move message to Old messages folder after emailing.<br />
<br />
'''NO''' = messages will not be moved after emailing.<br />
<br />
'''Note: This option should not be enabled with delete after emailing. If you enable both, the message will not be emailed but it will be deleted.'''<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Say Caller ID'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | State Caller ID prior to playback of the message.<br />
'''YES''' = play caller id prior to message content.<br />
<br />
'''NO''' = do not play caller id prior to message content.<br />
<br />
'''N/A''' = accepts the system wide default defined under PBX Setup=>Voicemail. If the default setting is acceptable and works within your business, we recommend leaving the parameter set to N/A.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow Review'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Allow callers to review a message after they have recorded it.<br />
'''YES''' = give callers leaving messages the option to review and rerecord the message they are leaving.<br />
<br />
'''NO''' = do not give callers the option to rerecord.<br />
<br />
'''N/A''' = accepts the system wide default defined under PBX Setup=>Voicemail. If the default setting is acceptable and works within your business, we recommend leaving the parameter set to N/A.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow Operator'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Allow pressing “0” during the voicemail greeting to reach the system-wide operator.<br />
'''YES''' = allow dialing 0 from mailbox.<br />
<br />
'''NO''' = disallow dialing 0 from mailbox.<br />
<br />
'''N/A''' = accepts the system wide default defined under PBX Setup=>Voicemail. If the default setting is acceptable and works within your business, we recommend leaving the parameter set to N/A.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Play Envelope Message'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Play the time of call prior to the message.<br />
'''YES''' = enabled.<br />
<br />
'''NO''' = disabled.<br />
<br />
'''N/A''' = accepts the system wide default defined under PBX Setup=>Voicemail. If the default setting is acceptable and works within your business, we recommend leaving the parameter set to N/A.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Auto Delete Voicemail In'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Define the number of days in which voicemail messages are to be automatically deleted from a mailbox. If this is set to “'''0'''” (zero) the voicemail message will never expire.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow Dial Out Access'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | This allows the ‘Dial Out’ feature when a user is listening to their voicemail.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Exclude from Directory'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | This indicates whether to exclude this extension from the directory.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Mailbox Operator'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If a caller presses “'''0'''” (zero) while listening to your mailbox greeting, the caller will be routed to this destination. Also, this is where a user will be sent if he dials ”0” from this extension. '''Set this to None to use the system default''' '''which is set under PBX SetupGeneral.'''<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Mailbox Exit Destination'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | The Mailbox Exit Destination is where the system will route a caller who presses '''<nowiki>#</nowiki>''' when they finish leaving a voicemail message. '''Setting this to None will use the system default, which is set under PBX SetupGeneral.'''<br />
|}<br />
<br />
===== Edit Voicemail Settings =====<br />
<br />
The following outlines the steps to set voicemail parameters.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Edit Extensions''' page, locate the extension that you want to update. Click the [[File:penciledit.png]] (edit extensions) icon to the right of the name. <p>You can also '''edit multiple''' extensions by selecting (placing a checkmark) in the boxes to the left of the extensions you want to update. Click the Edit PBX Settings button located at the top right hand corner of the list.You will see the extensions that are currently being updated. Make sure that the “'''Only save the changed field'''s” box is selected.</p><br />
#The '''Extension Detail '''page appears. Select the link to open the '''Advanced Settings''' page.<br />
#Make the necessary changes in the '''Voicemail Settings''' section of the page.<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes. The system returns you to the '''Edit Extensions''' page.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Extensions - Allow CODECs Section ====<br />
<br />
These transmission speeds are configured by the service provider and designed to automatically register in the extension through the system.<br />
[[File:codecssettings.png|center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0"<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Sections/Fields'''<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''CODEC Permissions (Allow CODECs)'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | Allows the administrator to define which codec the extension should use, and specify a priority from top down.<br />
<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0"<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000; border-left:0.0069in solid #000000; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''IMPORTANT: Please contact IPitomy’s Technical Support Group for assistance if you feel you need to change these settings.'''<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|}<br />
<br />
===== Edit CODEC Settings =====<br />
<br />
The following outlines the steps to set CODECs parameters.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Edit Extensions''' page, locate the extension that you want to update. Click the [[File:penciledit.png]] (edit extensions) icon to the right of the name. <p>You can also '''edit multiple''' extensions by selecting (placing a checkmark) in the boxes to the left of the extensions you want to update. Click the Edit PBX Settings button located at the top right hand corner of the list.You will see the extensions that are currently being updated. Make sure that the “'''Only save the changed field'''s” box is selected.</p><br />
#The '''Extension Detail''' page appears. Select the '''Advanced''' link to open the '''Advanced Settings''' page.<br />
#Make the necessary changes in the '''Allow CODECs Settings''' section of the page. Clicking Up or Down when highlighting a codec will allow you to raise or lower its usage priority.<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes. The system returns you to the '''Edit Extensions''' page.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Extensions Calling Permissions Section ====<br />
<br />
Calling permissions define the types of calls that can be sent and received from an extension and the call actions this extension can take. For example, you may want to limit who has the ability to monitor another extension.<br />
[[File:callingpermissions.png|center]]<br />
<br/>The following table describes the settings for an extension’s calling permissions.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0"<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Sections/Fields'''<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow User to Control Forwarding'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), this allows the user to modify their forwarding and schedule settings when they log into the Smart Personal Console user interface.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow User to Control Follow-Me'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), this allows the user to modify their Follow-Me settings when they log into the Smart Personal Console user interface.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow User to Control Phone Key Settings'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), this allows the user to modify their Phone Key settings when they log into the Smart Personal Console user interface.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Internal Calls'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), this permits calls made from internal extensions.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow Incoming Intercom Paging'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), this permits a page to be heard through this extension.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow Outgoing Intercom Paging'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), this permits a page to be made through this extension.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow User to Forward Calls'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), this permits an extension to forward a call or voicemail message to another destination on the system.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow User to Record Calls'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), this permits the extension to record phone conversations.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow user to Listen to Others’ Calls'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), this allows the user to listen to other user’s phone conversations.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow User to Whisper'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), this allows the user to whisper to another user during a phone conversation. Whisper is similar to Listen but you can coach and only the person at the extension can hear.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow Others to Whisper'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), other extensions can Whisper to your extensions calls<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow Others to Listen'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), other extensions can Listen to your extensions calls<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow Others to Record this User’s Calls'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), other extensions can Record calls at your extension<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Allow Call Park'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), this permits extension to park a call.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Is Operator'''<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | If '''Enabled''' (checked), the extension is designated as an operator. Being an operator allows the extension to control Day/Night mode overrides.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
===== Add/Edit Calling Permissions =====<br />
<br />
The following outlines the steps to set calling permissions for extensions.'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Edit Extensions''' page, locate the extension that you want to update. Click the [[File:penciledit.png]] (edit extensions) icon to the right of the name. <p>You can also '''edit multiple''' extensions by selecting (placing a checkmark) in the boxes to the left of the extensions you want to update. Click the Edit PBX Settings button located at the top right hand corner of the list.You will see the extensions that are currently being updated. Make sure that the “'''Only save the changed field'''s” box is selected.</p><br />
#The '''Extension Detail''' page appears. Select the '''Advanced''' link to open the '''Advanced Settings''' page.<br />
#Make the necessary changes in the '''Calling Permissions''' section of the page.<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]]button to save the changes. The system returns you to the '''Edit Extensions''' page.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Extensions - Follow-Me Section ====<br />
<br />
The Follow Me feature allows the PBX to try and find a user by calling pre-configured numbers, simultaneously or in sequence of priority. Once answered, the called party is given the option to accept or reject the call. If the call is rejected, or not answered at all, the call will return to the PBX allowing the caller to leave a Voice Mail message.<br />
[[File:followmesetup.png|center]]<br />
<br/>From this window it is easy to configure numbers to be dialed by the system in order to find the user. You can adjust the Name, Number (Number to be dialed), Type of Device that is being called, Rings to wait for an answer, and you can weight the priority from 1-20 (20 being lowest 1 being highest) to define search order.<br />
<br />
The Use radio box allows you to easily turn on and off numbers to be dialed. Since the SPC can be accessed via remote management, this allows the users to modify and create these lists from remote locations easily. The following table details the parameters and descriptions necessary to configure the Follow-Me feature.<br />
<br />
The system also allows you to record your own Prompts (recordings) under '''PBX''' '''Setup'''=>'''Prompts''', and then use those prompts as custom messages for FollowMe feature.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| '''Sections/Fields'''<br />
| <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| '''Play the Incoming Message to Caller before Starting Search'''<br/><br />
| When Enabled (checked), the system plays the Status Prompt to the caller.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Record the Caller’s Name and Play it to You'''<br />
| When Enabled (checked), the caller will be asked to record their name, and will announce that recorded name prior to prompting the called party to accept or reject the call.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Play the Unreachable Message if You Could Not Be Found'''<br />
| When Enabled (checked), this will play the Sorry Prompt if the call is not answered, otherwise it goes right to the voicemail greeting.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Number of Seconds to Total Search Time so Caller Has Time to Listen & Record'''<br />
| This allows you to configure how many seconds the system will spend searching for the called party. Default is 12 seconds.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Call From Prompt'''<br />
| This plays when Record the Caller’s Name and Play it to You is enabled (checked). The system default message is “Incoming Call From” followed by the recording the caller made of their name.<br />
|-<br />
| '''No Recording Prompt'''<br />
| This plays when Record the Caller’s Name and Play it to You is disabled (not checked). The system default message of “You have an incoming call” followed by the Options Prompt.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Options Prompt'''<br />
| This plays after you have answered the call and prompts you to press either “1” to accept the call or “2” to reject the call. The system default message can be changed, but the options remain the same.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Please Hold Prompt'''<br />
| This plays to the caller alerting them that the system is going to find the user they are trying to reach. The system default message of “Please hold while I try to locate the person you are calling” will play during the search process.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Status Prompt'''<br />
| This plays the system default message of “The person you are calling is not at their desk, I will try to locate them for you”.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Sorry Prompt'''<br />
| This plays if the person could not be reached or they reject the call. The system default message of “I’m sorry, but I was unable to locate the person you were calling”.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Music On Hold'''<br />
| This allows you to specify a particular Music On Hold playlist to play to the caller during the search process. The system default Music on Hold (set at PBX Setup->Music on Hold) will play when this parameter is set to system default.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Numbers'''<br />
| If selected (checked), the Follow Me feature will try to either simultaneously or in sequence of priority to try and locate you by using this call list.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
==== Add/Edit Follow Me Settings ====<br />
<br />
The following outlines the steps to set calling permissions for extensions.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From the '''Edit Extensions''' page, locate the extension that you want to update. Click the [[File:penciledit.png]] (edit extensions) icon to the right of the name.<br />
#The '''Extension Detail''' page appears. Select the '''Advanced''' link to open the '''Advanced Settings''' page.<br />
#Click on the '''Numbers and Settings''' button under the '''Follow-Me''' section of the '''Advanced''' page.<br />
#The '''Administrator View Follow-Me Settings/Extensions''' window appears.<br />
#Make the necessary changes in the '''Follow-Me''' parameters. Click on the '''SAVE''' button to save the changes to the Follow-Me settings. A message confirming the changes will appear.<br />
#Click the '''EXIT''' button to close the window.<br />
#Click the [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes. The system returns you to the '''Edit Extensions''' page.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the right hand corner of the top of the page, to commit the changes to the database.</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Extensionsadvsettings.png&diff=2128
File:Extensionsadvsettings.png
2013-05-29T15:24:01Z
<p>Nichole: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{RMImage<br />
|Filename=File:Extensionsadvsettings.png<br />
|CopyrightBy=<br />
|CreationDate=2013/05/29<br />
|Uploader=Nichole<br />
|UploadDate=2013/05/29<br />
|Description=<br />
|Keywords=<br />
|Format=image/png<br />
|RelatedArticles=User:Nichole<br />
}}</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Extensionsadvsettings.png&diff=2127
File:Extensionsadvsettings.png
2013-05-29T15:24:01Z
<p>Nichole: uploaded a new version of &quot;File:Extensionsadvsettings.png&quot;: updated</p>
<hr />
<div></div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Createextension.png&diff=2126
File:Createextension.png
2013-05-29T15:19:42Z
<p>Nichole: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{RMImage<br />
|Filename=File:Createextension.png<br />
|CopyrightBy=<br />
|CreationDate=2013/05/29<br />
|Uploader=Nichole<br />
|UploadDate=2013/05/29<br />
|Description=<br />
|Keywords=<br />
|Format=image/png<br />
|RelatedArticles=User:Nichole<br />
}}</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Createextension.png&diff=2125
File:Createextension.png
2013-05-29T15:19:42Z
<p>Nichole: uploaded a new version of &quot;File:Createextension.png&quot;: updated</p>
<hr />
<div></div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=IP_PBX_Manual_Providers&diff=2124
IP PBX Manual Providers
2013-05-29T15:14:22Z
<p>Nichole: /* Configuring Hardware Trunks */</p>
<hr />
<div>__NOTITLE__ {{IP_PBX_Manual|sortkey=Providers}} <span style="font-size:x-large">'''Providers'''</span><br />
<br />
Providers provide telephone network connectivity, (a.k.a PSTN connectivity).&nbsp; Examples of providers:&nbsp; an analog telephone line, or a SIP Provider or a T-1 PRI.&nbsp; VoIP providers and other telecommunication resources. This section of the system is where these provider resources are configured. The PBX system is equipped to handle two types of providers: &nbsp;Hardware and SIP providers. &nbsp;<br />
<br />
== Hardware Providers<br/> ==<br />
<br />
Hardware providers or trunks are associated with telephone lines that connect to the PSTN. These lines process inbound and outbound communication traffic that flows over communication channels. For example, a T1 can be a trunk resource that has multiple lines and multiple Direct Inward Dialed (DID) numbers. These individual numbers can be routed to different destinations within the system.<br />
<br />
== Connection Types<br/> ==<br />
<br />
The IP PBX is equipped to support an assortment of hardware cards as discussed earlier. Depending on which card you have, the PBX can integrate with analog lines, T1, or PRI.<br />
<br />
== Provisioning a New Hardware Trunk Group ==<br />
<br />
Provisioning a hardware trunk defines how the system works with the provider equipment, tells the system what phone numbers are associated with the trunk, and establishes rules for the system to follow when processing incoming and outgoing calls through this physical network connection.<br />
[[File:provisioning.png|center]]<br />
<br/>The following table describes the fields and functions available on the Hardware Trunks Provider Configuration page.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| '''Section'''<br />
| <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| colspan="2" | <center>'''Configuration Section'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| '''Slot'''<br />
| Defines which physical PCI slot the card is connected to.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Channels'''<br />
| This indicates whether the card has channels configured. Using the mouse to hover over this field will provide you with the number of channels at are set for this card.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Model'''<br />
| This is the model or type of card.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:setbutton.png]]<br />
| This button changes the card set in the database for the adjacent slot. The change is immediate and will delete trunks associated with another card in the same slot.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:addlinesbutton.png]]<br />
| Selecting this button will take you to the Channel Group Parameters Card Configuration page, where you can create a channel group.<br />
|-<br />
| colspan="2" | <center>Channel Groups Section</center><br />
|-<br />
| '''Name'''<br />
| The name associated with this channel group.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Channels'''<br />
| The number of channels that have been assigned.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Card'''<br />
| The card number associated with the channel group.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Action'''<br />
|[[File:penciledit.png]] - Clicking on the pencil icon allows you edit the settings for the selected channel group.<br />
[[File:deleteselected.png]]- Clicking on the “X” icon allows you to delete/remove the selected channel group.<br />
<br />
'''NOTE: You must delete channels from outbound routes in order to delete them.'''<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| colspan="2" | <center>'''T-1 Span Configuration'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| '''Span'''<br />
| Should automatically set to the appropriate span in regards to the cards that are installed in the PBX.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Timing'''<br />
| Set per your providers instructions, “0” (zero) would be the PBX provides timing, “1” would be the timing is provided by the Provider.<br />
|-<br />
| '''LBO'''<br />
| Line Build Out, set per your providers instructions.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Framing'''<br />
| Set per your provider’s instructions.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Coding'''<br />
| Set per your provider’s instructions.<br />
|-<br />
| '''PRI'''<br />
| Check if the trunk is a PRI, leave blank if the trunk is a standard T-1.<br />
|-<br />
| colspan="2" | <center>'''T-1 PRI Configuration'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| '''Span'''<br />
| Should automatically set to the appropriate span in regards to the cards that are installed in the PBX.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Switch Type'''<br />
| Defines what type of equipment the PBX is communicating with.<br/><br />
Set per your provider’s instructions.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Reset Interval'''<br />
| Set per your provider’s instructions.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Dialplan'''<br />
| Set per your provider’s instructions.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Indication'''<br />
| Set per your provider’s instructions.<br />
|-<br />
| '''D Channel'''<br />
| Set to 24.<br />
|-<br />
| colspan="2" | <center>'''USB Device Browser'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| '''Slot'''<br />
| Should automatically set to the appropriate slot that corresponds to the USB slot the device is connected to.<br />
|-<br />
| colspan="2" | <center>'''Hardware Functions'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| '''Restart USB Devices & PBX Services'''<br />
| This button will restart USB devices and PBX Services.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
''Table 12Hardware Trunk Provider Settings and Descriptions''<br />
<br />
=== '''Configuring Hardware Trunks''' ===<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Navigate to '''Providers'''->'''Hardware Trunks'''. The '''Hardware Trunk (Providers)''' page appears. The hardware trunks and their values that have already been provisioned will be displayed.<br />
#The system will allow configuring of up to 2 cards that interface with analog or T-1 devices. Select the card models installed in your IP PBX individually and click '''Set '''button for each card in order to tell the system which cards you have.<br />
#Once you have set the card, click the '''Add''' '''Lines''' button to the right of the corresponding card to define line/channel/trunk groups associated with that card. The '''Edit Hardware Provider''' page appears.<br />
#:[[File:confighardwaretrunks.png]]<br />
#Edit the necessary parameters. Required fields are: Group Name, Signalling Type, Start Channel, and End Channel. The rest of the fields can be configured as needed, or left at their defaults. (refer to the table below for descriptions and recommended settings)<br />
#Click on the [[File:savechanges.png]] button.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page to commit the changes to the database.<br />
#Once the changes are applied, navigate to the '''Hardware Providers''' page and click the '''Restart USB and PBX Services''' button.<br />
<br />
The following table describes the fields and parameters available on the '''Add/Edit Hardware Provider Configuration''' page:<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| '''Section/Field'''<br />
| <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| colspan="2" style="text-align: center;" | '''Channel Group Parameters Card 1'''<br />
|-<br />
| '''Group Name'''<br />
| This is the name for the groups of channels you want to create. This Group Name will be associated with the line/channel group.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Signaling Type'''<br />
| This is the type of signaling used for these channels/lines. Recommendation and default settings are listed below:<br />
*Analog lines should be set to fxs_ks.<br />
*T-1 lines should be set to fxs_ls or em_w<br />
*T-1 PRI lines should be set to pri_cpe.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Generate Ringing on Outbound Calls?'''<br />
| This should only be checked if the telephone company is not providing ringing. Default this is disabled.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Answer Incoming?'''<br />
| This indicates whether the system should answer incoming calls on these lines/channels. The default value is Yes.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Start & End Channel'''<br />
| Used to define the Start and End channel for this group on the associated card. If you would like a 1 channel group set the start and end channel to the same value (i.e. Start=1 and End=1).<br />
{|<br />
|-<br />
| <br />
| IMPORTANT: If you wish to address analog lines individually you must build multiple single channel groups. T1 and PRI can be grouped with multiple channels and routed via DID.<br />
|}<br />
|-<br />
|'''FAX Detect'''<br />
| update text<br />
|-<br />
| '''Allow Caller to transfer outbound call?'''<br />
| This indicates whether the system will allow user to transfer a call they origninated that has been connected to the PSTN. Default this is disabled.<br />
|-<br />
|'''Disable Pre Answer Ringing?'''<br />
| update text<br />
|-<br />
| '''Answer After'''<br />
| If the system is configured to answer incoming calls, this defines how many seconds to wait before answering the call. At times this field needs to be tweaked to ensure consistent CID. Default this is set to 0.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Dial Prefix'''<br />
| Digits defined here will be dialed out the trunk ahead of the digits dialed by the user. This would be required if your provider needs a 9 or some other digit to dial outbound. Analog trunks might need a one second pause which is denoted by a lowercase w. Default this is blank.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Allow Call Recording?'''<br />
| This setting toggles the ability to record calls on this trunk. Default this is disabled.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Ext CID Override?'''<br />
| This setting allows the users to set an alternate caller ID under their extension that will override the outgoing caller ID. If this is enabled, then this allows extension caller id override capabilities. Default this is disabled.<br />
<br />
<br />
{|<br />
|-<br />
| <br />
| IMPORTANT: Contact your provider to determine whether CID override is allowed on your specific trunk<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Restrict CID Override?'''<br />
| This setting is used to limit an extension’s ability to override Caller ID (CID). If enabled, this allows extension CID Override only for the phone numbers defined for this provider. Default this is disabled.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Use Caller ID'''<br />
| This setting indicates whether the system should attempt to detect caller id on the lines/channels in this group. Default this is set to Yes.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Echo Cancellation'''<br />
| This allows you to configure the Echo Cancel parameter. By default this is set to Yes (128) which will work in most scenarios. Adjustments can be made as needed.<br />
|-<br />
| '''RX Gain'''<br />
| This allows you to set or adjust the gain on sound received from these lines/channels. Typically these settings don’t need to be changed from default settings, unless there are issues relating to the volume on the calls. (This setting is in decibels so 3.0 = 100% increases in volume). Default this is set to 0.0.<br />
|-<br />
| '''TX Gain'''<br />
| This allows you to set or adjust the gain on sound transmitted to these lines/channels. Typically these settings don’t need to be changed from default settings, unless there are issues with the volume on the calls. (This setting is in decibles so 3.0 = 100% increases in volume). Default this is set to 0.0.<br />
|-<br />
|'''Echo Cancel Algorithm'''<br />
| update text<br />
|-<br />
| '''Inbound Caller ID'''<br />
| This is the name of the Caller ID of the inbound calls on this trunk. If set to the system default “asreceived', the calls will capture the Caller ID information sent over the incoming lines. Otherwise you can override the name and number that appears to those receiving calls on the corresponding channels.<br />
<br />
<br />
{|<br />
|-<br />
| <br />
| '''IMPORTANT''': If you need to change this parameter, we recommend that you contact IPitomy’s Technical Support Group at (941) 306-2200 for the proper syntax or additional information.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Echo Cancellation Bridged'''<br />
| This allows you to enable or disable the Echo Cancellation Bridge parameter on calls routed internally across the network. Set this parameter to”YES” (enable) if you want echo cancellation on calls that are bridged from one port to another on the network. Default this is set to No.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Busy Detect'''<br />
| By default, this is set to YES and8. This allows you to enable/disable and set the number of busy signals the system will detect before disconnecting from the call (hanging up). Set the parameter to “YES” if you want the PBX to hang up after it detects a busy signal.<br />
The number field is the number of busy tones the system must detect before it disconnects from the call (hangs up).<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Outbound Caller ID Name'''<br />
| Any values entered here will display as the Outbound CID Name when making calls out this trunk. If this is left blank, the name displayed on outbound calls will match what is registered with the provider. Blank by default.<br />
<br />
<br />
{|<br />
|-<br />
| <br />
| '''IMPORTANT''': Contact your provider to determine whether CID override is allowed on your specific trunk<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Outbound Caller ID Number'''<br />
| Any numbers entered here will display as the Outbound CID number when making calls out this trunk. If this is left blank, the number displayed on outbound calls will match what is registered with the provider. Blank by default.<br />
<br />
<br />
{|<br />
|-<br />
| <br />
| '''IMPORTANT''': Contact your provider to determine whether CID override is allowed on your specific trunk<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Echo Training'''<br />
| This parameter is used to adjust the time spent training the echo cancellation algorithm before a call is picked up. The length of time is set in milliseconds (ms), and is set to 800 by default.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Route Calls to'''<br />
| This is the default destination for the trunk. A destination is where calls from this provider will be routed to, unless a specific Direct Inward Dial (DID) is indicated. A typical destination is defined as a Menu, Extension, Schedule, Voicemail, or a Ring Group. This can also be set under the Incoming Routing page.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Relax DTMF (Detection)'''<br />
| This allows you to turn On/Off the Relax DTMF detection. Enabling this setting allows the line/channels to be more permissive of tone lengths and result in over detecting. By default this is set to No.<br />
<br />
<br />
{|<br />
|-<br />
| <br />
| '''IMPORTANT''': We recommend that this parameter is set to NO unless you are having issues. Please contact IPitomy’s Technical Support Group for assistance or more information.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''DTMF Tone Duration'''<br />
| This allows you to set the DTMF tone duration in milliseconds (ms) for generated tones generated by calls bridged to SIP devices. Default value of 300.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Use Inbound CoS'''<br />
| This allows you to enable/disable inbound routing and provides the dial plan that corresponds to the outbound routes in this Class of Service (CoS). This is Off by default.<br />
<br />
<br />
{|<br />
|-<br />
| <br />
| '''IMPORTANT''': Use this only if you intend to provide PSTN connectivity to 3rd party equipment. Please contact IPitomy’s Technical Support Group for assistance or more information.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Phone Numbers'''<br />
| On a T1 or PRI, this is where you would configure any DID information. Only numbers or a + should be entered for a DID. Once configured, you can define a different inbound destination for each number, allowing you to route calls to separate places. Contact your provider to find out if they are sending 4, 7, or 10 digits inbound for the DID.<br />
|-<br />
|'''Dial Out Order'''<br />
| update text<br />
|}<br />
<br />
==== Add Phone Numbers to Hardware Provider ====<br />
<br />
Once all the destinations are created, they will appear in a drop-down list and can be selected for updating.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
If a DID destination is set to NONE, it will route to the default location for the trunk itself.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
#From '''Channel Groups''' section of the '''Hardware Provider''' page, click the icon to the right of the name you want to modify. The '''Edit Hardware Providers''' page appears.<br />
#The hardware trunks and their values that have already been provisioned will be displayed. Scroll down the page to the '''Phone Numbers''' section. Enter the phone number that you want to add then click the '''ADD''' button. You can also copy and paste a list in. The list should be separated by newline characters.<br />
#The phone number entered will appear in the drop-down list to the right of the '''ADD''' button. The numbers will be listed in sequential order.<br />
#Click on the button to save the changes to the system.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Remove Phone Numbers from Hardware Provider ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From '''Channel Groups''' section of the '''Hardware Provider''' page, click the icon to the right of the name you want to modify. The '''Edit Hardware Providers''' page appears.<br />
#Scroll down the page and click on the field to the left of the '''REMOVE''' button. Scroll through the drop-down list to find the phone number that you want to remove.<br />
#Click on the desired phone number. Click on the '''REMOVE''' button to the right of the list. The phone number is deleted and will not appear in the drop-down list.<br />
<br />
#:Use the CTRL or SHIFT button to select multiple or a range of extensions from the list.<br />
<br />
#Click on the [[File:savechanges.png]] button to save the changes to the system.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
== Provisioning a SIP Provider<br/> ==<br />
<br />
SIP Providers are VoIP service provider accounts or other SIP-based devices that provide PSTN connectivity. SIP provider accounts can have multiple phone numbers or Direct Inward Dialing numbers (DIDs). The individual numbers can be routed to different destinations within the system as DIDs.<br />
[[File:addprovider.png|center]]<br />
[[File:sipprovider.png|center]]<br />
[[File:sipprovider2.png|center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0"<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000; border-left:0.0069in solid #000000; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000; border-left:none; border-right:0.0069in solid #000000; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''IMPORTANT: SIP Providers settings vary widely. To simplify the provisioning process, we recommend that you ask the provider for a sample Asterisk configuration. Please contact IPitomy’s Technical Support Group for assistance.'''<br />
|}<br />
<br />
The following table describes the fields and functions available on the SIP Provider Configuration page:<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| '''Sections/Fields'''<br />
| <center>'''Description'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| colspan="2" | <center>'''SIP Provider Section'''</center><br />
|-<br />
| '''Name'''<br />
| Name assigned to the SIP Provider. If given a username, this needs to match that field.<br />
|-<br />
| '''User Type'''<br />
| User type of the associated SIP Provider. This can be '''User''', '''Friend''', or '''Peer'''.<br />
|-<br />
| '''DTMF Mode'''<br />
| DTMF tone for the trunk. This can be '''Inband''', '''rfc2833''', '''info''', or '''auto'''.<br />
|-<br />
| '''RFC2833 Compensate'''<br />
| This advanced feature is sometimes necessary when using RFC2833 is problematic or if the SIP provider has indicated that it is required.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Host'''<br />
| The domain or IP address associated with the SIP host.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Port'''<br />
| If your SIP provider requires registration on a port other than the default 5060, set this field to Custom and enter that port value; otherwise set to Default.<br />
NOTE: Be sure to forward this alternate port in your router or the traffic will not be passed through.<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Register'''<br />
| Registration option for the SIP Provider.<br />
*YES = Automatically generates based upon provided settings<br />
*NO = Doesn’t require authentication from the SIP Provider<br />
*CUSTOM =Allows for any special authentication rules required from the SIP Provider<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Authentication'''<br />
| Authentication (previously “Authorization”) requirements for the SIP Provider.<br />
*YES = Automatically generates based upon provided settings<br />
*NO = Doesn’t require authentication from the SIP Provider<br />
*CUSTOM =Allows for any special authentication rules required from the SIP Provider<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Authorized User'''<br />
| Some providers require a different Authorization User Name than the Username provided. The sample asterisk configuration from your provider will let you know if this field needs to be set to Custom<nowiki>; otherwise set to </nowiki>Default.<br />
|-<br />
| '''From User'''<br />
| The sample asterisk configuration from your provider will let you know if this field needs to be set to Custom<nowiki>; otherwise set as </nowiki>Default.<br />
|-<br />
| '''From Domain'''<br />
| This parameter is rarely used and if needed, the SIP Domain information can be obtained from your SIP Provider<br />
|-<br />
| '''Realm'''<br />
| If your provider requires you to set the Realm to something other than asterisk, set to Custom and enter the realm given; otherwise this can be set to Default.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Outbound Proxy'''<br />
| Enable if the SIP Provider requires you to provide a different outbound IP address, otherwise leave as Default.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Username'''<br />
| Username used for Registration and Authentication.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Secret'''<br />
| The password used for SIP Registration and Authentication.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Inbound Caller ID'''<br />
| This parameter should be left blank to display incoming caller ID as received. Otherwise you can override the name and number that appears to those receiving calls on the corresponding channels.<br />
<br />
<br />
{|<br />
|-<br />
| <br />
| '''IMPORTANT''': If you need to configure the system in a different way, please contact IPitomy’s Technical Support Group for assistance and the proper syntax needed.<br />
Contact us via phone at 941-306-2200 option 2 or via email at [mailto:support@ipitomy.com support@ipitomy.com]. Additional information can be found at faq.ipitomy.com.<br />
<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Outbound Caller ID Name'''<br />
| Enter an outbound Caller ID name that will override the Caller ID name that is displayed on outgoing calls through this provider.<br />
<br />
<br />
{|<br />
|-<br />
| <br />
| '''IMPORTANT''': Contact your provider to determine whether CID override is allowed on your specific trunk<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Outbound Caller ID Number'''<br />
| Enter the Caller ID number that will override on outgoing calls through this provider..<br />
<br />
<br />
{|<br />
|-<br />
| <br />
| '''IMPORTANT''': Contact your provider to determine whether CID override is allowed on your specific trunk<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Call Limit'''<br />
| Set to match the number of concurrent calls allowed by the SIP trunk. (Usually consistent with SIP provider subscription limit.)<br />
|-<br />
| '''Qualify'''<br />
| This is the number of milliseconds (ms) the system should wait before checking to see if the SIP provider is available. Check with your provider to see what value this should be set to. Typically this can be left at the default value of 30000.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Default Destination'''<br />
| This is where all inbound calls will be routed to, unless a different specific destination is designated for DIDs on an individual basis.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Dial Prefix'''<br />
| Set this parameter only if the SIP Provider requires it.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Area Code'''<br />
| This parameter is obsolete and will be removed in future releases.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Generate Ringing On Outbound Calls'''<br />
| This parameter should only be enabled (checked) if ringing is not provided by the SIP Provider.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Allow Outbound Caller to transfer'''<br />
| Enabling this parameter allows a user to transfer a call that they originated on this trunk. Default is disabled.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Allow Call Recording'''<br />
| If enabled (checked), this parameter allows calls to be recorded.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Ext CID Override'''<br />
| If enabled (checked), this parameter allow the users to set an alternate caller ID under their extension that will override the outgoing Caller ID. Default is disabled.<br />
<br />
<br />
{|<br />
|-<br />
| <br />
| '''IMPORTANT''': Contact your provider to determine whether CID override is allowed on your specific trunk<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Restrict CID Override?'''<br />
| This setting is used to limit an extension’s ability to override Caller ID (CID). If enabled, this allows extension CID Override only for the phone numbers defined for this provider. Default this is disabled.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Can Reinvite'''<br />
| This parameter allows a mechanism to reconnecting calls midstream.<br />
*'''YES''' = if the phone type allows the re-invite feature<br />
*'''NO''' = if the phone type does not allow the re-invite feature<br />
*'''N/A''' = accepts the system wide default defined under PBX SetupSIPAdvanced. If the default setting is acceptable and works within your business, we recommend leaving the parameter set to N/A.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Send Remote Party ID'''<br />
| Usually not required. Leave on “N/A” unless advised differently by tech support.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Trust Remote Party ID'''<br />
| Usually not required. Leave on “N/A” unless advised differently by tech support.<br />
|-<br />
| '''Insecure'''<br />
| This parameter allows you to specify how to handle connections with peers. Explanation of the different options available on the drop-down list are:<br />
*'''PORT''' = Ignore the port number where authentication came from.<br />
*'''INVITE''' = Do not require the initial invite to authenticate.<br />
*'''PORT+INVITE''' = Do not require initial invite to authenticate and ignore the port where the request came from.<br />
*'''YES '''= To match a peer based by IP Address only and not the port.<br />
*'''VERY''' = To allow registered hosts to call without re-authenticating.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
|-<br />
| '''Allow Codecs'''<br />
| Encodes a stream or signal for transmission. Select which codecs will be enabled for this provider. Can typically be left to defaults.<br />
|-<br />
| colspan="2" | <center>Phone Numbers Section</center><br />
|-<br />
| '''Phone Numbers'''<br />
| This is where you would configure any DID information. Only numbers or a + should be entered for a DID. Once configured, you can define a different inbound destination for each number, allowing you to route calls to separate places. Contact your provider to find out if they are sending 4, 7, or 10 digits inbound for the DID.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
=== Add New SIP Provider ===<br />
<br />
The following section outlines the steps to add a new SIP Provider in the PBX system.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Click '''Providers'''=>'''SIP Providers'''. The '''SIP Providers''' page appears.<br />
#Click on the '''Add Provider''' button. The '''Edit SIP Provider''' page is displayed.<br />
#Configure the pertinent fields per your SIP Providers instructions. See the table above for descriptions.<br />
#Click on the [[File:savechanges.png]] button.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Add Phone Numbers ====<br />
<br />
The following section outlines the steps to Add phone numbers to the SIP Provider.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Click '''Providers'''=>'''SIP Providers'''. The '''SIP Providers''' page appears.<br />
#From the SIP Providers page, select the SIP provider link (under the '''Name '''field) or the [[file:penciledit.png]] icon to the left of the provider you want to modify. The '''Edit SIP Providers''' page appears.<br />
#Scroll down to the '''Phone Numbers''' section of the page. Enter the phone number in the box above the ADD button then click '''ADD'''. The number enter will appear in the list to the right of the box.<br />
#To add multiple phone numbers at one time, press the '''ENTER''' key to move to the next space on the list then enter the number. Click on the '''ADD''' button and all the numbers will appear in the list box (on the right). You can also copy and paste a list in. The list should be separated by newline characters.<br />
#Click on the [[File:savechanges.png]] button, once all the numbers have been added, to save the changes.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Remove Phone Numbers ====<br />
<br />
The following section outlines the steps to remove phone numbers from the SIP Provider.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Click '''Providers'''=>'''SIP Providers'''. The '''SIP Providers''' page appears.<br />
#From the SIP Providers page, select the SIP provider link (under the '''Name '''field) or the [[File:penciledit.png]] icon to the left of the provider you want to modify. The '''Edit SIP Providers''' page appears.<br />
#Scroll down to the '''Phone Numbers''' section of the page. Select the number that you want to remove from the list then click the '''REMOVE''' button. The number enter will be deleted from the list.<br />
#To remove multiple phone numbers, hold down the '''SHIFT''' key to select the numbers in sequence or the '''CTRL''' key to select in random order. Click the '''REMOVE''' button to delete the numbers selected.<br />
#Click on the [[File:savechanges.png]] button, to save the changes.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
==== Set Destination ====<br />
<br />
The following section outlines the steps to set a Destination for DID phone numbers.<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Click '''Providers'''=>'''SIP Providers'''. The '''SIP Providers''' page appears.<br />
#From the SIP Providers page, select the SIP provider link (under the '''Name '''field) or the [[File:penciledit.png]] icon to the left of the provider you want to modify. The '''Edit SIP Providers''' page appears.<br />
#Scroll down to the '''Phone Numbers''' section of the page. Select the number that you want to assign a destination. Select the desired Destination from the drop-down list then click the '''SET''' button.<br />
#To assign the same destination to multiple phone numbers, hold down the '''SHIFT''' key to select the numbers in sequence or the '''CTRL''' key to select in random order. Click the desired Destination from the drop-down list the click '''SET''' button. You can also set the destinations under Call Routing'''=>Outgoing.'''<br />
#Click on the [[File:savechanges.png]] button, to save the changes.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.<br />
<br />
&nbsp;<br />
<br />
==== Delete SIP Provider<br/> ====<br />
<br />
The following section outlines the steps to DELETE a SIP Provider in the PBX system.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0"<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000; border-left:0.0069in solid #000000; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | <br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000; border-left:none; border-right:0.0069in solid #000000; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''IMPORTANT: '''You must remove all instances of the SIP provider from any outbound dialing routes before you can delete it.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#Click '''Providers'''=>'''SIP Providers'''. The '''SIP Providers''' page appears.<br />
#From the '''SIP Providers''' page, [[File:deleteselected.png]] icon to the left of the provider you want to delete. The SIP provider will be removed and will no longer appear on the list.<br />
#Click on the [[File:savechanges.png]] button, to save the changes.<br />
#Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Confighardwaretrunks.png&diff=2123
File:Confighardwaretrunks.png
2013-05-29T15:03:29Z
<p>Nichole: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{RMImage<br />
|Filename=File:Confighardwaretrunks.png<br />
|CopyrightBy=<br />
|CreationDate=2013/05/29<br />
|Uploader=Nichole<br />
|UploadDate=2013/05/29<br />
|Description=<br />
|Keywords=<br />
|Format=image/png<br />
|RelatedArticles=User:Nichole<br />
}}</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Confighardwaretrunks.png&diff=2122
File:Confighardwaretrunks.png
2013-05-29T15:03:29Z
<p>Nichole: uploaded a new version of &quot;File:Confighardwaretrunks.png&quot;: updated</p>
<hr />
<div></div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Provisioning.png&diff=2121
File:Provisioning.png
2013-05-29T15:01:13Z
<p>Nichole: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{RMImage<br />
|Filename=File:Provisioning.png<br />
|CopyrightBy=<br />
|CreationDate=2013/05/29<br />
|Uploader=Nichole<br />
|UploadDate=2013/05/29<br />
|Description=<br />
|Keywords=<br />
|Format=image/png<br />
|RelatedArticles=User:Nichole<br />
}}</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Provisioning.png&diff=2120
File:Provisioning.png
2013-05-29T15:01:13Z
<p>Nichole: uploaded a new version of &quot;File:Provisioning.png&quot;: updated</p>
<hr />
<div></div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Tcpipsettings.png&diff=2119
File:Tcpipsettings.png
2013-05-29T14:58:30Z
<p>Nichole: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{RMImage<br />
|Filename=File:Tcpipsettings.png<br />
|CopyrightBy=<br />
|CreationDate=2013/05/29<br />
|Uploader=Nichole<br />
|UploadDate=2013/05/29<br />
|Description=<br />
|Keywords=<br />
|Format=image/png<br />
|RelatedArticles=User:Nichole<br />
}}</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Tcpipsettings.png&diff=2118
File:Tcpipsettings.png
2013-05-29T14:58:29Z
<p>Nichole: uploaded a new version of &quot;File:Tcpipsettings.png&quot;: updated</p>
<hr />
<div></div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=IP_PBX_Manual_System_Admin&diff=2117
IP PBX Manual System Admin
2013-05-29T14:56:09Z
<p>Nichole: /* IP PBX Administration Options */</p>
<hr />
<div>__NOTITLE__<br />
{{IP_PBX_Manual|sortkey=Administration}}<br />
<br />
<br />
<span style="font-size:x-large">'''System Administration'''<br/></span><br />
<br />
== Administration Menu ==<br />
<br />
IPitomy IP PBX’s online administration makes it simple to meet the demands of a frequently changing business. It is also designed to be quick to setup and install. The '''Administration Menu''' is located in the '''Navigation Bar''' to the left of the page.<br />
<br />
== IP PBX Administration Options ==<br />
<br />
This menu contains the administration pages used to configure the system. The Administration Menu is divided into six sections. To navigate to an '''Administration Page''' click on the menu section and page to be changed.<br><br />
[[File:Adminoptions.png|left]]<br />
*'''System''': System setup consists of network configuration settings.<br />
*'''Providers''': Providers are sources of PSTN and VoIP connectivity. Providers are the lines that handle all incoming and outgoing calls. All VoIP providers will be setup here. DID numbers are also entered here.<br />
*'''Destinations''': Destinations are extensions, groups of extensions, automated attendants (menus), conferences and voicemail. Destinations are places where calls get routed to in the system.<br />
*'''Applications''' : update text<br />
*'''Call Routing''': Routing sends callers to specific inbound destinations within the system, and routing outbound callers over specific outbound routes like local, long distance, international and emergency.<br />
*'''PBX Setup''': System settings allow global configuration settings for system applications like PBX timers, voice messaging settings and music-on-hold.<br />
*'''Reporting''': The system displays usage reports, diagnostic information and monitors system activity.<br />
*'''Diagnostics''': update text<br />
<br />
=== Administration Page Layout ===<br />
<br />
Each online Administration web page contains the standard layout. The following section describes the features or links you will have access to on each page.<br />
[[File:Adminpagelayout.png|center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|-<br />
| <center>Link</center><br />
| <center>Description</center><br />
|-<br />
| Title Bar<br />
| The Title Bar at the top of each page displays the name of the section of the Administration Menu which is currently being edited.<br />
|-<br />
| Default Values<br />
| When the system is installed it automatically registers default values in many of the administration fields. This simplifies the implementation process.<br />
|-<br />
| Advanced Link<br />
| In several of the online administration features there is an Advanced link where the most sophisticated capabilities of the IPitomy IP PBX can be configured. If available (depending on applicable functions), the Advanced link will be located on the lower left side of each page.<br />
|-<br />
| About Us Link<br />
| The About Us link is located at the bottom left corner of each page This link provides additional information about IPitomy.<br />
|-<br />
| Contact Us Link<br />
| The Contact Us link is located at the bottom left corner of each page. This link will take you to the Contact Us page that provides you with important contact information for IPitomy Communications, LLC. The IPitomy team is never more than a call or email away. To contact an IPitomy team member, click on Contact Us in the lower left corner of the page.<br />
|-<br />
| Apply Changes<br />
| To apply changes to the system you must click the Apply Changes button. Located in the top right corner of the page, this link globally applies changes to the system which is different than the Save Changes button that only saves changes to the current page.<br />
|-<br />
| Logout<br />
| The Logout link located at the top right corner of the page allows you to logout of the Administration page and takes you back to the IP PBX Admin Login page.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
=== Navigational Tools ===<br />
<br />
The following section describes the navigation tools (buttons) that will allow you to perform various functions such as Add, Delete, Save or Update data within the Administration system. These buttons will appear where the functions are applicable to the type of data being created or modified.<br />
<br />
'''Note:''' Depending on the page that is being displayed, the buttons/icons may be referred to (labeled) differently. This list describes the more commonly seen and used buttons/icons.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
{| style="border-spacing:0"<br />
|-<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.075in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Button/Icons'''<br />
| style="background-color:#b8cce4; border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:2.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | '''Description'''<br />
|-<br />
|style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | [[File:Viewmoreoptions.png]] <br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:.05in; padding-left:1.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | This button or icon allows you to expand or open the function to view more options. <br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | [[File:Collapse.png]]<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:.05in; padding-left:1.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | This button or icon allows you to collapse or close the function.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.55in; padding-right:0.075in" | [[File:Dropdownlist.png]]<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:.05in; padding-left:1.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | This button or icon allows you to view the items from a drop down list.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.45in; padding-right:0.075in" | [[File:Checkboxblank.png]][[File:Checkboxgreen.png]]<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:.05in; padding-left:1.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | This checkbox button or icon allows you to select or deselect the record for viewing or modifying, as well as to define if certain features are enabled.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.45in; padding-right:0.075in" | [[File:Radiobuttonblank.png]][[File:Radiobuttongreen.png]]<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:1.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | This radio button or icon allows you to select or deselect (toggle) between options.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.52in; padding-right:0.075in" |[[File:Penciledit.png]] <br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:1.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | This pencil icon allows you to edit the current settings for a specific record (i.e. extensions or groups).<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.52in; padding-right:0.075in" | [[File:Pencilextensionedit.png]]<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:1.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | This pencil with a phone icon allows you to edit an extension’s current phone settings.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.52in; padding-right:0.075in" | [[File:Downloadbutton.jpg]]<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:1.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | This down arrow icon allows you to download a file off of the system.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.52in; padding-right:0.075in" | [[File:Deleteselected.png]]<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:1.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | This “'''X'''” icon allows you to delete the item selected<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.52in; padding-right:0.075in" | [[File:Restorefile.png]]<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:1.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | This curved arrow icon allows you to restore a file to the system or in some cases, clear out voice messages.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.41in; padding-right:0.075in" | [[File:Addbutton.png]]<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:1.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | The '''Add''' button allows you to create a new'''destination, provider, route, schedule, '''etc. For example, to add a new extension, click the '''Add''' button on the Extension Administration page. In some cases, the Add button will change (have a different label) depending on the function or page you are viewing or updating. For instance, the button may be displayed as , if you are on the Menus page.<br />
|-<br />
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff; border-right:none; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:0.27in; padding-right:0.075in" | [[File:Savechanges.png]]<br />
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff; padding-top:0in; padding-bottom:0in; padding-left:1.5in; padding-right:0.075in" | Located in the bottom left corner of the screen, the Save Changes button executes all the changes made to the current page. '''This button must be pressed before leaving a page or changes will be lost'''.<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br/>An easy way to get the information that is required for a specific parameter or field is to mouse over it. A callout box with a description of the requirements or recommended settings will appear.<br />
<br />
=== Login Page ===<br />
[[File:Loginpage.png|center]]<br />
==== Logging In ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
#From a web browser (ie. Firefox), enter the '''IP Address''' of the System Administration site.<br />
#Using the Admin Login (left side), enter the username and password of the PBX. The default login information is:'''&nbsp; Username''' = pbxadmin '''Password''' = ipitomy<br />
#The '''PBX Administration''' screen appears. Now you can navigate around the PBX, configuring different features as needed.<br />
<br />
==== Logging Out ====<br />
<br />
'''STEPS:'''<br />
<br />
*You can logout of the '''PBX Administration''' page at anytime by clicking on the '''Logout''' link located on the top right corner of the screen.<br />
*The system logs out and returns you to the '''PBX Administration Login''' page.</div>
Nichole
http://wiki.ipitomy.com/index.php?title=File:Adminoptions.png&diff=2116
File:Adminoptions.png
2013-05-29T14:54:40Z
<p>Nichole: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{RMImage<br />
|Filename=File:Adminoptions.png<br />
|CopyrightBy=<br />
|CreationDate=2013/05/29<br />
|Uploader=Nichole<br />
|UploadDate=2013/05/29<br />
|Description=<br />
|Keywords=<br />
|Format=image/png<br />
|RelatedArticles=User:Nichole<br />
}}</div>
Nichole